Proximity switches. 2/20 SIMATIC PXS100 2/20 Compact range 0 2/22 Compact form 3SG16 2/24 Sonar thru-beam sensor

Transcription

1 Proximity switches / Introduction /3 Sonar proximity switches /0 SIMTIC PXS00 /0 Compact range 0 / Compact form 3SG6 / Sonar thru-beam sensor /6 SIMTIC PXS00 /6 Compact range M30 K /30 Compact range M8S /3 Compact form K08 /33 SIMTIC PXS300 /33 Compact range M30 K /37 Compact range M8 /39 Compact form K65 / SIMTIC PXS00 / Compact range M30 K3 /7 SIMTIC PXS900 /7 Double layer sheet monitoring /9 ccessories for sonar proximity switches /9 SONPROG interface device /5 Mounting accessories /5 Opto proximity switches /6 SIMTIC PXO00 /6 M8S form /6 M8 form /65 SIMTIC PXO00 /65 K0 form /67 C0 form /69 K80 form /7 SIMTIC PXO300 /7 D form /73 M5 form /7 M form /76 SIMTIC PXO00 /76 K, KR forms /78 K standard, KR standard forms /80 K0 form /8 K3 form /83 K30 form /85 SIMTIC PXO500 /85 L8 form /87 L0 form /88 L50 form /90 L50HF, L50HF advanced, L80HF forms /9 C0 form /93 ccessories for opto proximity switches /93 Plastic optical fibers /95 Mounting brackets /97 Reflectors /08 Inductive proximity switches / SIMTIC PXI00 / Operating dist /6 Operating dist. - /30 Operating dist. 5-0 /37 Operating dist. 5- / Operating dist. 5-0 /3 SIMTIC PXI300 /3 Operating dist. 0- / Operating dist. - /55 Operating dist. 5- /66 Operating dist. 5- /76 Operating dist. 5-0 /85 Operating dist /86 SIMTIC PXI00 /86 Operating dist. 0-0 /9 Operating dist. -5 /96 Operating dist /98 SIMTIC PXI600 /98 Operating dist. - /99 Operating dist. 5-8 /00 Operating dist /0 SIMTIC PXI900 /0 Operating dist. 3, pressure resistant to 500 bar /03 Operating dist. 0-6, with analog output /0 Capacitive proximity switches /06 SIMTIC PXC00 /06 DC 0 to 65 V /08 C 0 to 50 V /09 ccessories for all proximity switches /09 Power supplies /0 Connectors /6 Distributors /7 Mounting accessories Siemens FS 0 006

2 Proximity switches Introduction Proximity switches for reliable sensing, counting, measurement or monitoring utomation solutions are becoming more and more extensive and processes are more complex than ever before. Total control of all processes is therefore more important than ever. To maintain an overview here, it is essential to deploy all the available senses optimally. Proximity switches offer ideal characteristics for this for sensing, counting, measuring and positioning. Whatever the application or sector, the complete product range can always provide just the right feel for the job. Highlights Contactless detection of objects Extensive and complete product range including photoelectric, inductive, sonar and capacitive sensors International versions (UL/CS) Up to degree of protection IP69K, depending on type of sensor Integrated in Totally Integrated utomation with IQ-Sense Sonar proximity switches Sonar proximity switches can be used as non-contact proximity switches in many fields of automation. Whenever distances through air have to be evaluated, these devices can be used, because they not only detect objects, but can also output and evaluate the absolute distance between the Sonar proximity switches and the object. Changing environmental conditions (e.g. temperature variations) are compensated during evaluation of the measurement. Opto proximity switches The photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected. Depending on the type of ERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated. Inductive proximity switches Inductive proximity switches are the low-cost solution for non-contact detection of metal objects. Inductive proximity switches are extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to no-wear operation as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water. Capacitive proximity switches Capacitive proximity switches are also non-contact sensors for measuring conducting and nonconducting materials in solid, powder or liquid state. Totally integrated in TI IQ-Sense is a concept for the intelligent integration of sensors in automation systems. Just like all products and systems incorporated in Totally Integrated utomation, IQ-Sense devices also feature the same properties with respect to counications capability, data management and configuration/prograing. This provides advantages in every aspect, and not just enormous savings potential for engineering. For the first time, plant-wide counication down to the sensor level can be implemented not just extremely easily, but highly profitably as well. / Siemens FS 0 006

3 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Sonar proximity switches from 6 cm to 0 m they detect everything The sonar proximity switches detect objects in different materials, shapes, colors or consistencies with absolute precision, flexibility and reliability. The range of applications is almost limitless. In fill-level or height sensing, distance measurement or bottle counting - at distances from 3 cm to 0 m, they detect objects with widely differing characteristics. Regardless of whether they are liquid, solid, powder or even transparent. The nature of the surfaces is irrelevant, they can be rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry. The proximity switches are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration, ambient light or ambient noise. Highlights Measurement accurate to the millimeter Color and material-independent, even transparent objects Individual parameter setting Small, compact housing (M8S) Very high degree of repeat accuracy Can be used all over the world: UL/CS approvals Insensitive to temperature, noise, light or water Sensors with IQ-Sense pplication The wide range of areas of application for the Sonar proximity switch ultrasonic sensors gives full rein to the imagination: Fill level and height sensing Spacing measurement Winding diameter sensing ottle counting, and much more The sonar proximity switches are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration and ambient noise. pplications in food processing For use in contact with food or corrosive chemicals, on request, the ultrasonic sensors can be protected with Teflon film and supplied in a stainless-steel enclosure. Objects Using ultrasonic technology, sonar proximity switches can detect objects of any kind, this includes liquids, powders or granulates, and colored or transparent objects. Whether the surface of the object is rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry is of no consequence. Even at a maximum operating distance, all level or smooth surfaces can be reliably detected up to an angular variation of approximately 3 from the sound cone. Depending on the peak-tovalley height of the object, the angular variation may also be higher. s a rule, the objects can enter the sound cone from any direction. Explosion protection The sonar proximity switches can be supplied in accordance with EU guideline 9/9/EG (TEX) classification 3D/3G on request. Personal safety Due to their physical characteristics, the sonar proximity switches cannot be used for safety-related applications (e.g. for the protection of personnel). NSD0_0080 PXS series The ultrasonic proximity switches are organized in different product families in accordance with their technical type and design: SIMTIC Sensors Type Design PXS00 Cylindrical Compact range 0, compact form 3SG6, thru-beam sensor PXS00 Cubic Compact series M30 K, compact series M8S, compact form K08 PXS300 PXS00 Cylindrical, miniature type Compact series M30 K, compact series M8, compact form K65 Cubic, miniature Compact range M30 K3 type PXS900 Special version Double-layer sheet monitoring Siemens FS /3

4 Sonar proximity switches Introduction pplication examples Size measurement Quality inspection Measurement of stack height Distance monitoring Measurement of diameter and speed Contour measurement Loop monitoring / Siemens FS Fill level measurement

5 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Design Mounting Sonar proximity switches can be operated in any mounting position. Mounting positions in which deposits can settle on the transducer surface must however be avoided. The best results are obtained if the Sonar proximity switches are aligned such that the ultrasound waves hit the object as near to the vertical as possible. If this is not possible (e.g. in the case of bulk material), the maximum possible range must be determined experimentally. This depends on the material, surface and alignment of the objects. To prevent undesirable reflections, the distance a must be maintained from disturbing objects around the axis of the sound cone. etween the sound cone axis and a smooth wall running in parallel to it, the distance b must be maintained to prevent disturbing reflections. The distance c must be maintained to ensure that no objects enter the blind zone (see under sound cones). Mounting multiple sensors Mutual interference between Sonar proximity switches that can result in spurious signals is excluded by maintaining sufficient distances between the sensors or an appropriate alignment. If two Sonar proximity switches of an identical design are mounted opposite each other, the distance d must be maintained between them. If two sensors of identical design are arranged in parallel, the distance e must be maintained between the sensors. To avoid mutual interference, proximity switches of compact ranges 0, M30 K, M30 K3 and M8 can be synchronized or operated in multiplex mode (see under Functions). Fouling The range of the proximity switch is reduced if the transducer surface is damaged or painted or if water or wet dirt is applied to it. Clearance a around the axis of the sound cone: keep space free of objects Sonar proximity switch with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 30 (00) 0 to to to 000 a cm > 6 > 30 > 60 > 90 > 50 Distance b between two Sonar proximity switches and a smooth surface b Sonar-ERO Sonar proximity switch with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 30 (00) 0 to to to 000 b cm > 3 > 5 > 30 > 0 > 70 Distance d between two Sonar proximity switches mounted opposite each other with the same sensing range Sonar proximity switch with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 30 (00) 0 to to to 000 d cm > 0 > 00 > 00 > 500 > 000 Distance e between two Sonar proximity switches arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object perpendicular to the axis of the sound cone Sound cone NSD0079 Sonar proximity switch with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 30 (00) 0 to to to 000 e cm > 5 > 60 > 50 > 50 > 350 Distance e between two Sonar proximity switches arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object with unfavorable orientation The distance e must be experimentally determined depending on the angle between the object and the Sonar proximity switch. Siemens FS /5

6 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Function The Sonar proximity switches only operate through the medium of air and can detect any objects that reflect ultrasound. The sensors emit ultrasonic pulses cyclically. When an object reflects these pulses, the generated echo is received and converted into an electrical signal. The incoming echo is detected in accordance with its intensity which, in turn, is dependent on the distance between the object and the Sonar proximity switch. The Sonar proximity switches operate according to the echo propagation principle, i.e. the time difference between the emitted pulse and the echo pulse is evaluated. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons. Resolution The resolution is the smallest change in the distance to the object that is necessary for a change in the output of the proximity switch. The internal resolution is 56 or 096 steps. If values are entered during prograing that exceed this resolution, the program will automatically correct them. The corrected values will be displayed in a window with a message. Example Sonar proximity switch 3RG60... (60 to 600 cm) For a sensing range 60 to 600 cm, this results in a resolution of.3 : = /096 =.3 ( bit) If the measuring range is restricted, the step size is reduced because the distance that is split up into 096 steps has reduced. The smallest step size is, however, limited to by the electronics. If the sensing range is restricted, the resolution is enhanced. Temperature compensation The Sonar proximity switches of compact ranges M30 K, M30 K3 and M8 are fitted with temperature sensors and a compensation circuit that equalizes changes in operating distances caused by temperature changes. Compensation can be performed throughout the temperature range. This means that an absolute precision of ±.5% (compact ranges M30 K and M30 K3) or of ±.5% (compact range M8) is achieved. Operating modes with switching output The Sonar proximity switches with switching output can be used in the following modes depending on their type (the graphics show sensors with NO function). Only emitter, only receiver Two Sonar proximity switches are required in each case for this operating mode. One is parameterized as a receiver and the other is parameterized as the emitter. There are two possible applications: 7 Thru-beam sensor: It is only evaluated whether an object lies between the proximity switches. The range is twice the normal range. djustment of the operating range and evaluation of the analog output is not relevant in this case. 7 ctive measurement system: The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal from the emitter to the receiver is measured. The enabling inputs of the two proximity switches must be connected together for this purpose. ll options of the proximity switches can still be used; the range is twice the normal range. Emitter and receiver This is the normal operating mode of the Sonar proximity switch; it operates as a typical proximity switch. 7 Diffuse sensor: In this case, the object that is to be detected acts as a reflector. s soon as an object enters the preset operating range, the echo from this object causes the output signal of the proximity switch to change. Operating range Object not detected, switching output not active Operating range Object detected, switching output active NSD0_00 7 Reflex sensor: In this case, a permanently fixed reflector (e.g. a small metal plate) is mounted opposite the proximity switch. The operating range is adjusted to this reflector. If the path between the proximity switch and the reflector is interrupted, the sensor no longer detects the reflector and this triggers a change in the signal at the switching output. Set operating range Reflector detected, switching output not active Set operating range Reflector hidden by object, switching output active NSD0_003 Emitter Object Receiver Object detected, switching output active NSD0_00a /6 Siemens FS 0 006

7 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Synchronization In compact ranges 0, M30 K, M30 K3 and M8, several devices can be synchronized with each other by simply interconnecting the synchronization outputs of the devices (Pin for NO function, Pin for NC function). Up to 0 devices can be synchronized (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0). This allows the sensors to be mounted extremely close to each other in many cases without causing mutual interference. dvantages 7 No additional wiring overheads, simply connect the enable inputs of the individual proximity switches. 7 Fast response, because every proximity switch is constantly active. Disadvantages 7 The object cannot be assigned to a particular proximity switch. Example Two Sonar proximity switches are mounted at a clearance e that is smaller than the minimum clearance (see mounting guidelines). n object is located in their coon sound field. The echo from can reach by reflection (G). Mutual interference can occur. The object is detected from the two echoes E and E by Sonar proximity switches and. If the two devices are synchronized, there may be no mutual interference, because for example, echo E arrives after echo E at proximity switch. The devices only ever respond to the first echo. e E G Example: Recognition of narrow objects Narrow objects are to be recognized and it shall be determined whether one, two or no objects are present. G E E In this example, echo G would cause proximity switch to mistakenly detect an object. Synchronization of the proximity switches would not help here because echo pulse E would not arrive until after echo G at proximity switch and a proximity switch only ever detects the first echo. In this example, a PLC must be used to switch cyclically to and fro between the two proximity switches. Internal multiplex mode The Sonar proximity switches of compact ranges M30 K, M30 K3 and M8 can be interconnected to form a network. Up to 0 devices (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0) can be operated in series or parallel (see "Synchronization"). No additional electronics is required. The enable inputs of all the proximity switches are simply connected together. On prograing, each device is informed about the number of proximity switches in the network as well as its own position (address) in the network. When they have been wired up and the supply voltage has been connected, the proximity switches automatically operate in multiplex mode. NSD0_095a E NSD0_09a Multiplex function External multiplex mode The fourth connection can be used as an external enabling input. This can be used to switch the Sonar proximity switch to active or inactive using an external control without the need to switch the supply voltage on and off. n external multiplex mode can be configured when Sonar proximity switches have to be switched on and off in sequence via the enabling input. In this case, it is ensured that the Sonar proximity switches will not interfere with each other. In contrast to internal multiplex mode, more than 0 Sonar proximity switches can be operated in multiplex mode. Connection of the enable input: 7 Sonar proximity switch active, Enable input XI at L+ or open. 7 Sonar proximity switch inactive, enable input XI at 0 V to 3 V DC dvantages: 7 Reliable protection against mutual interference. 7 n object can be assigned to a proximity switch. Disadvantages: 7 dditional connection overheads (e.g. a PLC). 7 Longer response time than for a synchronization circuit because each proximity switch is only active briefly and then has to wait until all the other proximity switches in the circuit have emitted. Siemens FS /7

8 Sonar proximity switches Introduction SONPROG interface device Using the SONPROG 3RX 000 interface device and SONPROG the relevant software, the Sonar proximity switches of compact ranges M30 K, M30 K3 and M8 can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements. The device is an interface for the following tasks: Checking the parameters of the Sonar proximity switch Modifying the parameters of the Sonar proximity switch ligning the Sonar proximity switch to the application. This enables a Sonar proximity switch to be optimized specifically for an application. The adjustments found can be saved or printed out to facilitate maintenance and documentation of the equipment. When a Sonar proximity switch has been replaced, the new device can be prograed with the saved data quickly and easily. No new adjustments are necessary. The main parameters that can be set are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic nalog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation ttenuation The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Diffuse or reflex sensor. For a detailed description of the possible settings, see "SONPROG PC interface", page /9. djustment with potentiometers The potentiometers are used to select the required limits (min. or max.) of the switching range. /8 Siemens FS 0 006

9 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Circuit diagrams Synchronization NO function NC function L+ L Synchronization cable L+ L Synchronization cable NSD0 096 U L+ XI L 3 NO U L+ XI L 3 NO NSD0 097 U L+ NC L 3 XI U L+ NC L 3 XI External multiplex mode NO function NC function L+ L L+ L NSD0 098 U 3 L+ XI L NO U 3 L+ XI L NO PLC 50 m PLC 50 m NSD0 099 U 3 L+ NC L XI U 3 L+ NC L XI PLC 50 m PLC 50 m Internal multiplex mode (analog output) NO function NC function L+ L Synchronization cable L+ L Synchronization cable NSD0 000 U L+ XI 3 L NO I a / Ua U 5 5 L+ XI 3 L NO I a / Ua NSD0 00 U L+ L+ NC NC U L L 3 3 XI XI 5 I a / Ua 5 I a / Ua Characteristic curves Sound cones The following diagrams are the results of measurements with Sonar proximity switches, with their production-dependent scatter, at room conditions (0 C). Standard reflectors moved radially are detected within the possible sensing range by the Sonar proximity switches. The diagrams apply to the individual types of sensor for the defined reflectors and for larger reflectors. Measurement with an aligned object, with the most optimum reflection keep environment free of objects which should not be detected. Measurement with an object which has partially aligned surfaces detection of round materials and plates with rounded edges. Measurement 3 with an object with a plane surface moving perpendicularly to the sound cone detection of plane surfaces and edges. Defined reflectors: Measurements, 3: plane object - cm cm, for sensors with sensing ranges up to 30 cm - 0 cm 0 cm, for sensors with larger sensing ranges Measurement : cylindrical object, 8 cm diameter. The following pages show the sound cones for the following designs: Compact range 0, K08 Sonar thru-beam sensor Compact range K65 Compact range M8, M8S Compact range M30 K, M30 K and M30 K3 Siemens FS /9

10 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Compact range 0, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Compact range 0, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 K 65 compact form, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Sonar thru-beam sensor, sensing ranges cm, cm, cm Receiver angle 0 Variable receiver angle, optimally aligned /0 Siemens FS 0 006

11 Sonar proximity switches Introduction M8 compact range, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Insufficient sensitivity Siemens FS /

12 Sonar proximity switches Introduction M8 compact range, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 / Siemens FS 0 006

13 Sonar proximity switches Introduction M8S compact range, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), Measurement (plane object), attenuation 0 attenuation 0 $ / 5 -!! / 5 - " * - >? J 5 M E@ JD E? " " $ # E E K ) L H= C = N E K # #!! # " " # >? J@ EI J=? E? * - >? J 5 M E@ JD E?! # E E K ) L H= C = N E K # #!! # " " # >? J@ EI J=? E? M8S and K08 compact range, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), Measurement (plane object), attenuation 0 attenuation 0 * - >? J 5 M E@ JD E? $ " " $ E E K ) L H= C = N E K / 5 - #! " # $ >? J@ EI J=? E? * - >? J 5 M E@ JD E? # "!! " # # / 5 - $ E E K ) L H= C = N E K # #!! # " " # >? J@ EI J=? E? M8S compact range, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), Measurement (plane object), attenuation 0 attenuation 0 * - >? J 5 M E@ JD E? # # # # E E K ) L H= C = N E K / 5 - % " $ & " >? J@ EI J=? E? * - >? J 5 M E@ JD E? & $ " " $ & / 5 - & E E K ) L H= C = N E K " $ & " >? J@ EI J=? E? Siemens FS /3

14 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Compact ranges M30 K to K3, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Insufficient sensitivity Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range M30 K. / Siemens FS 0 006

15 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Compact ranges M30 K to K3, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Insufficient sensitivity Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range M30 K. Siemens FS /5

16 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Compact ranges M30 K to K3, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range M30 K. /6 Siemens FS 0 006

17 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Compact ranges M30 K to K3, sensing range cm Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range M30 K. Siemens FS /7

18 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Further information ctive surface The active surface of an ultrasonic proximity switch is the surface at which the ultrasound is emitted and received (IEC). Reference axis The reference axis is the axis running perpendicularly through the active surface and through its center (IEC). Sensing range The sensing range is understood to be the range within which the operating distance can be set (IEC). With the Sonar proximity switches, this is a range from 3 cm to 0 m depending on the type. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons. Operating distance The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis (IEC). Rated operating distance s n The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defining the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC). Real operating distance s r The real operating distance is the operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC). ccuracy The accuracy is the permissible error that exists as the difference between the true distance and the indicated value. The accuracy of a Sonar proximity switch depends on internal tolerances as well as certain physical parameters of the air such as humidity, atmospheric pressure and air movement. These parameters influence the sound propagation time and therefore the measured value received. tmospheric pressure ny other atmospheric changes at a permanent site will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. etween sea level and 3000 m altitude, the speed of sound is reduced by less than %. Sound propagation is not possible in a vacuum. ir humidity t room temperature and at lower temperatures, the humidity will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. t higher temperatures, the speed of sound increases with humidity. ir temperature The sound propagation time is dependent on the air temperature. n air temperature of 0 C is used as the reference variable here. The speed of sound changes with air temperature by 0.7 %/K. This temperature dependent change in sound propagation time means that as the temperature increases, the distance to the object appears to become shorter. change in temperature of, for example, +0 C results in a change in the speed of sound of approximately +.75 % and therefore a change in the operating distance of +.75 %. Gas types The Sonar proximity switch is designed for operation in atmospheric air. If it is operated in other gases, different values for the speed of sound and attenuation can result in significant measurement errors and even malfunction (e.g. in carbon dioxide). ir currents Changes to the speed of sound as a result of constant changes in the flow direction and flow velocity of the air cannot be quantified by means of a generally applicable formula. High-temperature objects, such as glowing metal cause air turbulence. This will scatter or deflect the ultrasound. n echo will not be generated that can be evaluated. Precipitation Low levels of precipitation in the form of rain or snow will not adversely affect the functionality of the Sonar proximity switch. The transducer surface should not, however, be wetted. Dewing is permissible. Spray paint This has no determinable effect on the functioning of the Sonar proximity switch. To prevent any detrimental effect on the sensitivity of the transducer, however, the spray paint must not be allowed to settle on the active transducer surface. External sound External sound is distinguished from the system-specific echoes and does not usually cause malfunctions. Repeat accuracy R The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance s r at defined conditions (IEC). The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 3 C (± 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The repeat accuracy of the Sonar proximity switch is 0.5 % of full-scale. /8 Siemens FS 0 006

19 Sonar proximity switches Introduction Integration Sensors and PLCs are growing together Thanks to intelligent linking to the PLC, IQ-Sense can now be used to implement significantly more flexibility and reliability of the sensors. The uniform exchange of data presents a great number of advantages for plant construction as well as for its operation. For example, the new IntelliTeach function permits machine and plant constructors to achieve fast coissioning, since all settings for the IQ-Sense devices can be made using the PLC. Values set once on a sensor can be transmitted to other sensors without problem. Sensors can be exchanged during operation without any extra work since the PLC automatically reestablishes all sensor settings. Furthermore, IQ-Sense permits channel-specific system diagnostics. Wire break, short-circuit, maladjustment or module/sensor failure are automatically signaled, and parameterization errors are avoided. It is therefore possible to reduce downtimes and to increase plant availability. Highlights Configuration with STEP 7 Counication between sensor and SIMTIC PLC over a low-cost two-core cable Sensor parameterization through the control (IntelliTeach) System diagnostics down to a single sensor reduces downtimes Replacement of sensors during operation without re-parameterization The Sonar M8 proximity switch (range 6 to 30 cm and 5 to 00 cm) is connected via an 8 x IQ-Sense module to S7-300 and ET 00M. Integration of IQ-Sense into the automation environment Siemens FS /9

20 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range 0 Overview Design The devices of compact range 0 are supplied in the standard version with permanently installed sensors. The devices of compact range 0 can also be supplied with separate sensors. Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG63, the sensor is installed in an M8 shell and in devices of type 3RG63 3 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 5 in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of approximately.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the enclosure of compact range 0 is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. Compact range 0 with separate and fixed sensors Functions Compact range 0 is designed for simple applications. The devices are only suitable for operation as diffuse sensors. The sensors can be supplied with analog outputs. The end of operating range or analog range can be set using a potentiometer. The sonar proximity switches of compact range 0 are all-in-one Up to 6 devices can be synchronized with each other. units with a rectangular enclosure, and are ready for connection. They are available with two sensing ranges. Operates as diffuse sensor djustable by potentiometer Can be synchronized Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - nalog output Connection through M connector, type F Type 3RG63 3RG63 3 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H 5 0 Repeat accuracy R ± 0.5 ±.5 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 30 %) Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 35 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz 8 5 Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms 7 7 Switching status display Yellow Enclosure material CRSTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor mbient temperature During operation C During storage C /0 Siemens FS 0 006

21 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range 0 Fixed sensor Separate sensor Sensing range Rated operating Switching output nalog output current cm m pnp NO 3RG NO 3RG NC 3RG NC 3RG V 3RG63 3JK V 3RG63 3 3JK NO 3RG NO 3RG NC 3RG NC 3RG V 3RG63 3JK V 3RG63 3 3JK0 3RG RG Pot Poti Pot , NSD , ,3 Ultrasonic converter M NSD Typ 3RG RG M 8 M 30 SW SW 36 M 3,5 Type 3RG M8 SW 3RG M30 SW 36 Circuit diagrams NSD00759 U 3 L+ XI L- Output NSD00760 U 3 L+ Output L- XI View from rear onto device 3 NSD00a NO NC or frequency analog output output NC Siemens FS /

22 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 3SG6 compact form Overview Functions Range definition and adjustability The sonar proximity switch delivers a signal while an object is located in the set operating range or inhibit range, but outside the blind zone (see figure below). The sensing range between 0. and m is subdivided into 8 equal operating ranges of 0. m. Each operating range to 8 can be selected using a connector in the terminal compartment. The sonar proximity switch signals with one output and one in each case whether objects are located in the set operating range or in the so-called inhibit range that precedes it. With the help of the supplied prograing plug, two to eight of the separate operating ranges ( to 8) can be combined to form an extended operating range. The operating range is set with two prograing plugs. The plugs are fitted to a pin connector located in the terminal compartment of the device. The possible pin assignments are shown in the cover of the terminal compartment. Sound cone approx. 5 Sensing range (selectable operating ranges via jumpers in terminal compartment) 3SG6 compact form These sonar proximity switches in compact form for DC consist of complete, factory-assembled units, ready for connection. It cannot be combined with devices from the compact ranges. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Foreground and background suppression djustable using plug-in jumpers Solid-state outputs: - switching outputs Terminal compartment with screw terminals Design ll components are located into a single box-shaped enclosure. The ultrasonic converter and the terminal compartment are arranged on the same enclosure level. The electrical connections are made with screw terminals in the terminal compartment; cable entry is through an M0 cable gland. ligning unit To make it easier to align the sonar proximity switches with the object to be detected, a 3SX6 87 aligning unit is available. This unit allows swivelling about a horizontal and a vertical axis with an angle of rotation in each case of up to Set operating range e. g. 0.8 to 0.9 m Output (green ) 0 0, 0,8 0,9 m lind zone locking range: Output (red ) Operating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor sonar proximity switch switches when an object enters the sound cone from any direction, output (NO) outputs a -signal if the object is located within a set operating range ( to 8). Output (SX) outputs a -signal if the object is in the inhibit range. Objects in the blind zone do not cause a utilizable signal change on outputs and. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the ultrasonic beam will be interrupted by all objects in the inhibit range even those that absorb sound. In this case, output (NO) changes to the 0-signal. In the case of reflective objects in the inhibit range, output (SX) changes to the -signal at the same time. NSD0_0075 / Siemens FS 0 006

23 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 3SG6 compact form Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H 0 Repeat accuracy R ± Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 30 %) No-load supply current I 0 m < 60 Switching output Rated operating current I e m 50 Voltage drop V Residual current m 0.0 Ultrasonic frequency khz 00 Switching frequency f Hz Response time ms 0 Power-up delay t v ms 80 Switching status display Enclosure material Degree of protection mbient temperature Yellow CRSTIN; epoxy resin converter surface IP65 During operation C During storage C Sonar proximity switch 3SG6 : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 Dimension drawing Sensing range Rated operating Switching output Connection current cm m pnp NO Terminal compartment 3SG6 67 J87 ccessories ligning unit 3SX Æ5, NSD ,3x5,3 9,5 Sensor connector can be retrofitted Circuit diagram NSD00755 U 3 L+ Output L- Output Siemens FS /3

24 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Sonar thru-beam sensor Overview Functions Sonar thru-beam sensor The sonar thru-beam sensor comprises an ultrasonic emitter and a receiver. The emitter and receiver circuits are installed in separate box-shaped enclosures of molded plastic. Operation as thru-beam sensor 3 measurement ranges can be set Solid-state output: - Switching output Connection - With 3 m cable - With M8 connector, -pole, type - With M connector, -pole, type F Thru-beam sensor mode The emitter of the sonar thru-beam sensor emits a narrowly focused continuous tone in the direction of the receiver. The receiver located opposite evaluates this ultrasonic signal. Interruption of the tone by an object will cause the output signal to change. djustment of sensitivity The sensitivity can be adjusted at the receiver module at terminal (NO version) or (NC version). XI Switching Emitter/receiver distance frequency Hz cm Not connected 00 < 50 L 50 < 80 L+ 00 < 0 Object detection The minimum size of detectable objects depends on the distance between emitter and receiver. If the distance is less than 0 cm, objects cm or larger will be detected. The gap with between two objects must be at least 3. If the distance is shorter, gaps of < can even be detected. t maximum distance, objects greater than cm in size can be detected. In this case the gaps between the objects must be > cm. Transmitter Object Objeto Receptor NSD cm rrangement Type 3RG6 3.P (receiver) 3RG6 3.N (emitter) Sensing range cm Standard target cm Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current I 0 m < 0 < 30 Ultrasonic frequency khz 00 Switching frequency f Up to 0 cm Hz 00 Up to 80 cm Hz 50 Up to 50 cm Hz 00 Response time Up to 0 cm ms Up to 80 cm ms.5 Up to 50 cm ms Power-up delay t v ms < 0 Status indication Green Enclosure material CRSTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C / Siemens FS 0 006

25 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Sonar thru-beam sensor Sensing range Rated operating Switching output Connection current cm m pnp NO Cable, 3 m 3RG6 3 0P NC Cable, 3 m 3RG6 3 0P Emitter Cable, 3 m 3RG6 3 0NN NO M 8 connector 3RG6 3 7P NC M 8 connector 3RG6 3 7P Emitter M 8 connector 3RG6 3 7NN NO M connector 3RG6 3 3P NC M connector 3RG6 3 3P Emitter M connector 3RG6 3 3NN00 : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 3RG RG , 3RG For M 0 3,5 For M 0 3,5 NSD ,5 NSD ,5 Circuit diagrams NSD0075 U / 3 L- / L+ NSD00753a U WH/K U / 3 X L- K/WH / N L+ View from rear onto device 3 NSD00a Emitter Receiver (NO/NC) Siemens FS /5

26 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K Overview Design Standard version In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor. Version with separate sensor M30 form with fixed sensor Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or prograing capability. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor djustable with potentiometers Solid-state output Connection through M connector, 3-pin or -pin, type E, F M30 form with separate sensor Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG6., the sensor is installed in an M8 shell and in devices of type 3RG6.3 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 5 in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. Version with swivel sensor These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact range M30 K. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations. M30 form with swivel sensor The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 00 to the cylinder axis. Passive reflector With sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K, a 3RX 90 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "ccessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm. /6 Siemens FS 0 006

27 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K Functions Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output. Sonar-ERO Sound cone Object Operating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor n object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the sonar proximity switches will be operated by all objects that lie between the sonar proximity switches and the reflector even those that absorb sound. lind zone Initial value (adjustable) Set operating or analog range ( lit) Sensing range Final value (adjustable) NSD0_00756 Sound cone Type 3RG60. 3RG60.3 3RG60. 3RG60.5 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H Repeat accuracy R ± 0.5 ± ± 9 ± 5 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at... 0 V susceptibility falls by approx. 0 %) Rated operating current I e NO contact m 300 NC contact m 50 or 300 (see Selection and ordering data ) No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 50 Ultrasonic frequency f khz Switching frequency Hz 8 Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated; CRSTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C Siemens FS /7

28 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K Sensing range Rated operating Switching output nalog output current cm m pnp Fixed sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3D NO 3RG60 3 3D NO 3RG60 5 3D NO 3RG60 3D00 3RG NC 3RG60 3C NC 3RG60 3 3C NC 3RG60 5 3C NC 3RG60 3C00 3RG RG Swivel sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3D NO 3RG60 3 3D NO 3RG60 5 3D NO 3RG60 3D NC 3RG60 3C NC 3RG60 3 3C NC 3RG60 5 3C NC 3RG60 3C00 Separate sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3D NO 3RG60 3 3D NC 3RG60 3C NC 3RG60 3 3C0 /8 Siemens FS 0 006

29 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K With fixed sensor 3RG RG M 30x,5 3RG RG , SW NSD , ,3 M 30x,5 SW ,3 M 30x,5 SW 36 NSD ,5 NSD ,5 35 7,3 M x M x M x With swivel sensor 3RG RG NSD00783 M x 05 5 SW M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 3RG RG NSD0078 M x SW M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 7, NSD00785 M x SW 36 5 M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 65 With separate sensor 3RG RG Cable length,6 m SW 5 M 8x Cable length,6 m SW 36 5 M 30x,5 M 30x,5 SW M 30x,5 SW NSD00786 M x 7,3 0,5 NSD00787 M x 7,3 0,5 Circuit diagrams Compact range M30 K NSD00757 U 3 L+ L- Output NSD00758 U 3 L+ Output L- View from rear onto device 3 NSD00a NO NC Siemens FS /9

30 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M8S Overview Design Compact range M8S can be supplied with an aligned sensor head or an angled sensor head. The small physical size of the sensors makes them ideal for applications where space is limited. M8S form The sonar proximity switches of compact range M8S are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor djustable per teach-in (only with switching output) Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection through M, -pin connector, type F Functions vailable as diffuse sensors and reflex sensors. The sensors can be supplied with switching or frequency outputs. Due to their wide range and a minimized close range, they are suitable for a wide variety of applications. Prograing The sensors with a switching output can be set through the device terminals by means of a teach-in function. For the sensors with a frequency output, the range can be set with the wiring. Evaluation can be performed in a PLC or in a LOGO! mini PLC. Type 3RG6. 3RG6. 3RG6.3 Sensing range or or or djustment range or or or Standard target cm Differential travel H 0 or 0 or 0 or 3 Repeat accuracy R ± (frequency output ±.5) Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e m 50 No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 0 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated; CRSTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C /30 Siemens FS 0 006

31 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M8S Straight sensor ngled sensor ccessories Sensing range Rated operating Switching output current cm m pnp Operating mode/ frequency output NO Diffuse sensor 3RG NO Diffuse sensor 3RG NO Diffuse sensor 3RG NO Reflex sensor 3RG NO Reflex sensor 3RG NO Reflex sensor 3RG Hz 3RG6 3 3RS Hz Hz 3RG6 3 3RS Hz Hz Hz 3RG6 33 3RS NO Diffuse sensor 3RG NO Diffuse sensor 3RG NO Diffuse sensor 3RG NO Reflex sensor 3RG NO Reflex sensor 3RG NO Reflex sensor 3RG Hz 3RG6 3RS Hz Hz 3RG6 3RS Hz Hz Hz 3RG6 3 3RS00 Teach-In dapter 3RX 00 3RG6. (angled sensor) Sensing surface 8, M 8x NSD09 SW 3RG6 3. (straight sensor) 0,5 5,5 37 M 8x NSD090 SW M x M x Circuit diagrams NSD0_0080 U 3 Frequency output L+ ET L Output View from rear onto device 3 NSD00a Siemens FS /3

32 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 K08 compact form Overview Sonar proximity switches of K 08 compact form are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a rectangular metal enclosure. 3 versions with different operating modes: - Diffuse sensors with background suppression - Reflex sensor - Thru-beam sensor Diffuse sensor and reflex sensor: - Up to 0 devices can be synchronized - djustment per teach-in Solid-state outputs: - pnp and npn switching output - NO/NC adjustable Connection through M connector, 5-pin, rotatable by 90, type G Type 3RG6 5 3CC00 3RG6 5 3DC00 3RG6 5 3S00 Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range djustment range Standard target cm Differential travel H 0 Repeat accuracy R ± ± Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e m 50 No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 5 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Operational voltage Green Enclosure material Metal Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C Cubic form Sensing range Rated operating Switching output Operating mode current m pnp + npn selectable NO/NC contact each Diffuse sensor selectable Reflex sensor NO/NC contact each Thru-beam sensor emitter NO contact each Thru-beam sensor receiver 3RG6 5-3CC00 3RG6 5-3DC00 3RG6 5-3NN00 3RG6 5-3S00 Circuit diagrams YE GN M,5 NSD0_008 NO U 3 5 L+ S L- Switching output Switching output View from rear onto device 5 3 NSD00763a 5,6,6 8 Transducer M 65 NSD0_008 /3 Siemens FS 0 006

33 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 Compact range M30 K Overview Design Standard version In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor. Version with separate sensor M30 form with fixed sensor Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or prograing capability. Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor djustable using potentiometers, with SONPROG or per teach-in Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - or switching outputs - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection through M connector - -pole (with output), type F - 5-pole (with outputs), type G M30 form with separate sensor Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG6., the sensor is installed in an M8 shell and in devices of type 3RG6.3 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 5 in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. Version with swivel sensor These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact range M30 K. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations. M30 form with swivel sensor The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 00 to the cylinder axis. Passive reflector With sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K, a 3RX 90 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "ccessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm. Siemens FS /33

34 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 Compact range M30 K Functions Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output. Sonar-ERO Sound cone lind zone Sound cone Initial value (adjustable) Set operating or analog range ( lit) Sensing range Object Final value (adjustable) NSD0_00756 Operating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor n object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the sonar proximity switch and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors The sonar proximity switch only evaluates whether or not an object is located between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor. Prograing For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact range M30 K can be prograed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range nalog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values are available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 0 units. Type 3RG60. 3RG60.3 3RG60. 3RG60.5 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H Repeat accuracy R ± 0.5 ± ± 9 ± 5 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at... 0 V susceptibility falls by approx. 0 %) Rated operating current I e NO contact m 300 NC contact m 50 or 300 (see Selection and ordering data ) No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 50 Ultrasonic frequency f khz Switching frequency Hz 8 Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated; CRSTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C /3 Siemens FS 0 006

35 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 Compact range M30 K Sensing range Rated operating Switching output Frequency output current cm m pnp Fixed sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3F NO 3RG60 3 3F NO 3RG60 5 3F NO 3RG60 3F00 3RG NC 3RG60 3E NC 3RG60 3 3E NC 3RG60 5 3E NC 3RG60 3E00 3RG NO 3RG60 3H NO 3RG60 3 3H NO 3RG60 5 3H NO 3RG60 3H00 3RG NC 3RG60 3G NC 3RG60 3 3G NC 3RG60 5 3G NC 3RG60 3G Hz 3RG60 3RS Hz 3RG60 3 3RS Hz 3RG60 5 3RS Hz 3RG60 3RS00 Swivel sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3F NO 3RG60 3 3F NO 3RG60 5 3F NO 3RG60 3F NC 3RG60 3E NC 3RG60 3 3E NC 3RG60 5 3E NC 3RG60 3E00 Separate sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3F NO 3RG60 3 3F NC 3RG60 3E NC 3RG60 3 3E0 ccessories SONPROG interface unit, C V, DC V 3RX 000 Siemens FS /35

36 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 Compact range M30 K With fixed sensor 3RG RG M 30x,5 3RG RG , SW 36 NSD ,3 3 0,5 M x With swivel sensor 3RG RG NSD00783 M x 05 5 SW M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 M 30x,5 SW 36 With separate sensor 3RG RG Cable length,6 m SW 5 M 8x NSD00779 M x 99 7,3 50 0,5 M 30x,5 SW 36 3RG RG NSD0078 M x Cable length,6 m SW 36 SW M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 5 7,5 M 30x, NSD00780 M x NSD00785 M x 0 7,3 53 0,5 SW 36 5 M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 65 M 30x,5 NSD00786 M x SW , ,5 M 30x,5 NSD00787 M x SW , ,5 Circuit diagrams Compact range M30 K NSD00759 U 3 L+ XI L- Output NSD00760 U 3 L+ Output L- XI 3 NSD00a NO or frequency output Compact range M30 K with switching outputs NSD0_0076 U NO 3 5 L+ XI L- Switching output Switching output NC NSD0076 L+ Switching output U 3 L- XI 5 Switching output NC 5 3 NSD00763a /36 Siemens FS 0 006

37 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 Compact range M8 Overview Design The devices of compact range M8 are always supplied with permanently installed sensors. M8 form The sonar proximity switches of compact range M8 are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Operates as diffuse sensor, thru-beam sensor and can be parameterized as a reflex sensor with SONPROG djustable via a potentiometer, with SONPROG prograing device With ackground suppression, and can be set as foreground suppression with SONPROG Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - nalog output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection through M, -pin connector, type F Functions The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs. Up to 0 sensors of the M8 compact range can be synchronized with each other through the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode. For a detailed description, see "Compact range M30 K". Prograing For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact range M8 can be prograed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range nalog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 0 units. Type 3RG6 3 3RG6 33 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H 0 Repeat accuracy R ± ± Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at... 0 V susceptibility falls by approx. 0 %) Rated operating current I e m 50 No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 60 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz 5 Response time ms 00 0 Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated; CRSTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C Siemens FS /37

38 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 Compact range M8 Sensing range Rated operating current Switching output nalog/ frequency output cm m pnp NO 3RG NO 3RG NC 3RG NC 3RG m 3RG6 3 3LS m 3RG6 33 3LS m 3RG6 3 3TS m 3RG6 33 3TS V 3RG6 3 3JS V 3RG6 33 3JS Hz 3RG6 3 3RS Hz 3RG6 33 3RS00 Counications-capable proximity switches compact range M8 IQ-Sense from IQ-Sense IQ-Sense 3SF6 3 3J from IQ-Sense IQ-Sense 3SF6 33 3J00 ccessories SONPROG interface unit, 3RX 000 C V, DC V : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 3RG RG S00 M 8x M 8x 0 (-3) 65 SW 7,5 90,5 0 (-3) 65 SW 90,5 Poti NSD (x) NSD00775 (x) Circuit diagrams NSD00759 U 3 L+ XI L- Output NSD00760 U 3 L+ Output L- XI View from rear onto device 3 NSD00a NO or frequency output NC /38 Siemens FS 0 006

39 Overview Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 K65 compact form Functions Sensors with switching or analog output Within the sensing range, the fill level of a container is detected. If the fill level reaches one of the two switching thresholds (S min, S max ), the corresponding output is set. On emptying or filling, the switching outputs remain set in accordance with the differential travel (H min, H max ). This is signaled by the corresponding. If the level is located between the two operating ranges, both outputs are reset (see "Definition of the ranges"). Sonar-ERO S max S min lind zone S max H max K65 compact form The sonar proximity switches of the K 65 compact form are ready-to-use complete self-contained units. They operate with a DC supply. Their enclosure design and function makes them ideal for level applications in small containers. The devices feature two switching outputs (S min and S max ) to which different distances can be assigned. This allows, for example, the minimum and maximum fill level in a tank to be evaluated. The values are set using the SONPROG interface device or by means of automatic alignment (teach-in function). Design ll components are located in a box-shaped enclosure with rounded edges. The ultrasonic converter is mounted in the enclosure slightly recessed in the enclosure. The integrated encircling sealing ring allows the sonar proximity switch to be used as a plug with integrated level measuring. The tank opening must have a minimum diameter of 6. It can be fixed to the tank by means of two M5 screws. The electric connection is made using a 5-pin connector with M thread. S max S min H min S max S min Definition of the ranges S min Sensing range NSD0_00 lind zone Objects at close range cause fault signals, so the user must install the sensor such that the fill level cannot enter close range. Prograing For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact form K 65 can be prograed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range nalog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 0 units. Siemens FS /39

40 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 K65 compact form Type 3RG6 5 3RG6 53 3RG6 55 Sensing range cm Standard target cm 5 5 Switching threshold S max cm S min cm Differential travel H H max (adjustable) cm 5 0 H min (adjustable) cm Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at... 0 V susceptibility falls by approx. 0%) No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 60 Switching output Rated operating current I e m 50 Voltage drop V Switching element function S max NO contact Switching element function S min NO/NC prograable Ultrasonic frequency khz Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms 50 Displays Switching status yellow s Operational voltage Green Enclosure material CRSTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C ccessories Sensing range Rated operating current Switching output nalog/ frequency output Connection cm m pnp NO M connector 3RG6 5 3H NO M connector 3RG6 53 3H NO M connector 3RG6 55 3H NO... 0 m M connector 3RG6 5 3F NO... 0 m M connector 3RG6 53 3F NO... 0 m M connector 3RG6 55 3F NO m M connector 3RG6 5 3CF NO m M connector 3RG6 53 3CF NO m M connector 3RG6 55 3CF NO V M connector 3RG6 5 3GF NO V M connector 3RG6 53 3GF NO V M connector 3RG6 55 3GF NO Hz M connector 3RG6 5 3RS NO Hz M connector 3RG6 53 3RS NO, Hz M connector 3RG6 55 3RS00 SONPROG interface unit, C V, DC V 3RX 000 Teach-in adapter 3RX 00 : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 /0 Siemens FS 0 006

41 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS300 K65 compact form 8,8 5, NSD , 5 Circuit diagrams Sensors with switching output Connection NSD09a L + XI L - S min S max View from rear onto device utomatic alignment NSD003 View from rear onto device XI must be connected to L for the automatic alignment. Siemens FS /

42 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K3 Overview Design Standard version In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor. Version with separate sensor M30 form with fixed sensor Sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K3 are readyto-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or prograing capability. Operate as diffuse sensors, reflex sensors or thru-beam sensors djustable via potentiometers, with SONPROG prograing device Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching outputs - nalog output Connection via M, 5-pin, type G connector M30 form with separate sensor Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG6., the sensor is installed in an M8 shell and in devices of type 3RG6. 3 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 5 in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. Version with swivel sensor These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact range M30 K. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations. M30 form with swivel sensor The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 00 to the cylinder axis. Passive reflector With sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K3, a 3RX 90 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "ccessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the sonar proximity switch (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm. / Siemens FS 0 006

43 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K3 Functions Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output. Sonar-ERO Sound cone lind zone Sound cone Initial value (adjustable) Set operating or analog range ( lit) Sensing range Object Final value (adjustable) Operating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor n object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. NSD0_00756 Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the sonar proximity switch will be operated by all objects that lie between the sonar proximity switch and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors The sonar proximity switch only evaluates whether or not an object is located between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor. Prograing For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact range M30 K can be prograed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range nalog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. Sonar proximity switches with non-standard values available on request. The minimum ordering quantity is 0 units. Type 3RG6. 3RG6.3 3RG6.5 3RG6. 3RG6 76 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H Repeat accuracy R ± 0.5 ± ± 5 ± 9 ± 5 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple, at... 0 V susceptibility falls by approx. 0 %) Rated operating current I e NO contact m NC contact m 50 or 300 (see Selection and ordering data ) 50 No-load supply current I 0 m Max. 50 Max. 75 Ultrasonic frequency f khz Switching frequency Hz Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated; CRSTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface CRSTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 IP65 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C Siemens FS /3

44 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K3 Sensing range Rated operating Switching output nalog output current cm m pnp Fixed sensor 3RG NO... 0 m 3RG6 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 3 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 5 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 76 6H00 3RG NC... 0 m 3RG6 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 3 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 5 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 76 6G00 3RG NO m 3RG6 3CF NO m 3RG6 3 3CF NO m 3RG6 5 3CF NO m 3RG6 3CF NO m 3RG6 76 6CH00 3RG NC m 3RG6 3CE NC m 3RG6 3 3CE NC m 3RG6 5 3CE NC m 3RG6 3CE NC m 3RG6 76 6CG00 3RG NO V 3RG6 3GF NO V 3RG6 3 3GF NO V 3RG6 5 3GF NO V 3RG6 3GF NO V 3RG6 76 6GH NC V 3RG6 3GE NC V 3RG6 3 3GE NC V 3RG6 5 3GE NC V 3RG6 3GE NC V 3RG6 76 6GG00 : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 / Siemens FS 0 006

45 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K3 Sensing range Rated operating current Switching output nalog output cm m pnp Swivel sensor 3RG NO... 0 m 3RG6 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 3 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 5 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 3F NC... 0 m 3RG6 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 3 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 5 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 3E NO m 3RG6 3CF NO m 3RG6 3 3CF NO m 3RG6 5 3CF NO m 3RG6 3CF NC m 3RG6 3CE NC m 3RG6 3 3CE NC m 3RG6 5 3CE NC m 3RG6 3CE NO V 3RG6 3GF NO V 3RG6 3 3GF NO V 3RG6 5 3GF NO V 3RG6 3GF NC V 3RG6 3GE NC V 3RG6 3 3GE NC V 3RG6 5 3GE NC V 3RG6 3GE00 Separate sensor 3RG NO... 0 m 3RG6 3F NO... 0 m 3RG6 3 3F NC... 0 m 3RG6 3E NC... 0 m 3RG6 3 3E NO m 3RG6 3CF NO m 3RG6 3 3CF NC m 3RG6 3CE NC m 3RG6 3 3CE NO V 3RG6 3GF NO V 3RG6 3 3GF NC V 3RG6 3GE NC V 3RG6 3 3GE0 ccessories SONPROG interface unit, 3RX 000 C V, DC V : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 Siemens FS /5

46 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS00 Compact range M30 K3 With fixed sensor 3RG RG M 30x,5 3RG RG , SW 36 NSD , ,3 M 30x,5 SW ,3 NSD ,5 M 30x,5 SW NSD ,5 35 7,3 M x M x M x With swivel sensor 3RG RG NSD00783 M x 05 5 SW M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 3RG RG NSD0078 M x SW M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 7, NSD00785 M x SW 36 5 M 30x,5 7,3 0,5 65 With separate sensor Spherical 3RG RG RG Cable length 60 Cable length 8,5,6 m,6 m SW 5 SW M 8x M 30x,5 38 NSD M 30x,5 SW M 30x,5 SW NSD00786 M x 7,3 0,5 NSD00787 M x 7,3 0,5 Circuit diagrams Compact range M30 K3 NSD0076 L+ XI U 3 L- Switching output 5 nalog output NC NSD00765 L+ Switching output U 3 L- XI 5 nalog output NC 5 3 NSD00763a /6 Siemens FS 0 006

47 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS900 Double-layer sheet monitoring Overview The spacing between the emitter and receiver must be at least 0 and can be up to 60. Precise alignment is essential (± ). The operating range is reduced if they are not aligned along the axis. * # # ) $ " 5 -, 5,! = Sensor mounting Double-layer sheet monitoring with separate sensors The 3RX 0 sonar proximity switches for double-layer sheet monitoring comprise one signal evaluator and two sonar sensors (emitter and receiver). Reliable detection of multiple layers of paper, plastic sheets or metal foil Measuring range from 0 g paper to 00 g card Manual or automatic offset Sonar sensors in M8 enclosure Short-circuit proof electronic outputs (pnp) Connection through M connector. Design The emitter and receiver sensors are of the same type and must be mounted at an angle of 30 (±0 ) or 5 to the vertical. The setting is made using the internal S switch. If the system is operated at an inclination angle of 5 to 0, the S switch (operating mode) must be set to position "". The object to be detected must be located approximately 5 to 5 above the emitter. wider mounting angle increases the flutter range, e.g. at an angle of 0, fluttering within 60 % of the measuring range is permitted. Functions These devices are used mainly for monitoring sheets of paper as well as plastic and metal film. Each layer is compared to the stored reference value and indicated as a single or double layer accordingly. The 3RX 0 signal evaluator continuously signals the situation between the sonar sensors at the two outputs and. Output "Single layer" remains active as long as only one layer is located between the sensors. Output "Double layer" is activated as soon as two or more layers are detected between the sensors. Two s also indicate the status of the outputs. The yellow indicates a single layer and the red indicates a double layer. Prograing The signal evaluator can be set to two different modes , , ! : ), - / - ) ; 5-6 ) ) 7 *! 8, + -, , ) -, ) 7 6 5, ' = User interface Siemens FS /7

48 Sonar proximity switches SIMTIC PXS900 Double-layer sheet monitoring Manual setting Switch S (setting) is in position "". The sensor is set up for the material to be sensed either by pressing the "SET" button on the top of the device or by applying a control coand to the "SET" input of the M connector (pin 5). The value obtained remains stored until the setting procedure is repeated. The sensor is set by placing a single layer between the sonar sensors and activating the "SET" coand. The 3RX 0 requires max. 00 ms for the setting; i.e. the "SET" key must be pressed for this time, or a "" signal (> 6 V) must be present at pin 5. The green "SET" flashes during the setting. It lights up permanently following successful setting. utomatic setting Switch S (setting) is in position "0" (factory setting). Setting can be performed as described above or automatically when a layer is fed in and the supply voltage is applied if a layer lies between the sensors at this moment. utomatic setting is performed when a layer is fed in following an interval of s during which a layer was not detected between the sonar sensors. Sensing range Material strength (paper, cardboard) g Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 m < 75 Switching output Rated operating current I e m 00 Voltage drop at 00 m V < 3 Ultrasonic frequency khz 00 Switching frequency f Hz 00 Response time ms 5 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Switching status display Red and yellow s Enclosure material Evaluation unit Metal Sensor rass, nickel-plated; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65 mbient temperature During operation C During storage C Double-layer sheet monitoring Sensing range Rated operating current Switching output Connection cm m pnp NO M connector 3RX 0 Evaluation unit Sensor M8,3, M 8 NSD03 ~ NSD03 M 8 x M x /8 Siemens FS 0 006

49 Overview Sonar proximity switches ccessories SONPROG interface device The prograed values can be printed out and recorded. They will then be iediately available, for example, for series applications or for replacement of the sonar proximity switches. Parameters Operating range The coands "Lower limit of operating range" and "Upper limit of operating range" are used to define a window within the sensing range of the sonar proximity switch. If an object enters the operating range, the switching output is active (with NO contact). If an object is outside the operating range, the switching output is not active. In the case of sonar proximity switches of compact range M30 K with two switching outputs, the second switching output is active when an object is located between the blind zone and the operating range. Sonar-ERO Sound cone Object PC with SONPROG interface device and sonar proximity switches Using the SONPROG 3RX 000 PC interface device SONPROG and the relevant software, the following sonar proximity switches can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements: Compact ranges II and III Compact range M8 K 65 compact form. Scope of supply PC-Interface, Plug-in power supply Connecting leads to the PC and sonar proximity switches SONPROG software for Windows. Functions The SONPROG 3RX 000 prograing device allows the user to program several sonar proximity switches simultaneously. The lower and upper limit of the operating range can be saved at the click of a button for copying to other sonar proximity switches. For each sonar proximity switch, the following parameters can be set: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic nalog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation ttenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Function as diffuse or reflex sensor Fill level mode (see "Compact range for pump control"). The prograed values are saved in the sonar proximity switches and are retained even without interface or after the supply voltage has been disconnected. Sound cone Differential travel The differential travel can be adjusted to move the switch-on point and the switch-off point at the limits of the operating range away from each other. This prevents output flutter and level control tasks can be solved elegantly. 3 lind zone ERO NSD0_09a Initial value (adjustable) Set operating or analog range ( lit) Sensing range Final value (adjustable) Example: Fill level monitoring with adjustable differential travel Switching element function The function of the switching output that was set at the factory can be changed, e.g. from NO to NC. The pin assignments are not changed. This means that the switching output remains at pin even if a device is changed from NO to NC function. Switching frequency The sonar proximity switches can be switched over from standard switching frequency (in accordance with the technical specifications) and rapid switching frequency (3 times the standard value). ttention: sonar proximity switch with a rapid switching frequency is more sensitive to disturbance. NSD0_0080 Differential travel Differential travel Container NSD0_00756 ) Inhibit range ) Switching range 3) Sensing range ) lind zone 5) Switching output upper limit when level falls 6) Switching output upper limit when level rises 7) Switching output lower limit when level falls 8) Switching output lower limit when level rises Siemens FS /9

50 Sonar proximity switches ccessories SONPROG interface device nalog distance measurement Proximity switches with an analog output can detect the distance to an object. This distance is converted to an analog output signal that is proportional to it ( V, m or... 0 m). The resolution of the analog output is at least within the preset limits. 0 m m P Initial value 50 cm P Final value 90 cm Rising characteristic Falling characteristic NSD0_093 Sensing 0 cm range 30 cm Type 3RX 000 Required hardware PC with VG graphics card, serial interface COM or COM Required software MS-DOS Version 3. and higher Windows 3.X, Windows 95, 98 Windows NT Operational voltage C V, DC V Software-Update on the Internet: Design SONPROG interface unit 3RX 000 Example lind zone value must not be set for the blind zone that is less than the minimum value. This is the time that the sonar proximity switch requires to switch over from send to receive mode. The blind zone can be moved away from the sonar proximity switches (i.e. increased) to permit interfering objects in the foreground to be ignored. The interfering echo resulting from such an object is suppressed by extending the blind zone, and detection of the desired object is possible again. The range of the sonar proximity switches can be reduced in this case because part of the echo from the object to be detected is suppressed. However, objects are still not permitted within the original blind zone. It is important to ensure with this setting the object does not reflect ultrasound so well that double or triple echoes arise that give the impression of a more distant object. (a fault of this kind cannot occur during normal operation because only the first echo is accepted as valid). Sensing range Reducing the sensing range can enhance the resolution of the sonar proximity switches. With large sensing ranges, it is not possible to adjust some values in steps of one millimeter. The minimum resolution of a sonar proximity switch is. Mean value generation Unfortunate reflective conditions or moving surfaces (e.g. in the case of moving liquids and bulk material on conveyors) can cause the measured values to change continuously which results in constant switching. The sonar proximity switch allows a mean value to be generated from up to 55 measurements. Failed signals (when no object is in the sensing range) are ignored on mean-value generation. fter each measurement, a mean value is generated iediately from the new measured value and the stored number of old values. The response time of the sonar proximity switch is, therefore, not extended. delay only occurs at the end of a measurement if the object is removed from the sensing range. This delay corresponds to the measurement cycle time multiplied by the saved number of mean values. Sensitivity (see Sound cones ) The susceptibility of the receive amplifier is reduced here. Weakly reflecting objects at the edge of the sound cone are suppressed. It is also possible to reduce the size of the sound cone here electronically. The permitted values are 0 (maximum sensitivity) to 7 (minimum sensitivity). /50 Siemens FS 0 006

51 Sonar proximity switches ccessories Mounting sets Designation ligning unit with mounting bracket for sonar proximity switches M30 Swivel range approx. 0 around longitudinal axis of proximity switch. Following assignment, the proximity switch is screwed tight in the selected position. 3RX 30 ligning unit with mounting flange for sonar proximity switches M30 Swivel range approx. 0 around longitudinal axis of proximity switch. Following assignment, the proximity switch is screwed tight in the selected position. 3RX 30 Passive reflector for sonar proximity switches M30 3RX 90 d f NSD00 Mounting clamp (molded plastic) for sonar proximity switches, M8 form 3SX6 83 for sonar proximity switches, M30 form 3SX6 8 e a g b c 65 ligning unit for 3SG6 67 sonar proximity switches 3SX6 87 NSD For plug-in connectors and extension cables see page /0. Siemens FS /5

52 Opto proximity switches Introduction Opto proximity switches fast and precise with normal light and Laser light Safety-related applications The use of the sensors is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the proximity switch. NSD0_0080 Pure optical astuteness - this is what distinguishes these extremely precise, quick-acting and accurately pin-pointing optical proximity switches. This is supplemented by first-class ease of adjustment using a Teach-in function or potentiometer and easiest possible handling during operation. With the wide range of different designs, from cubic to cylindrical right down to miniature designs and different types, e.g. as diffuse sensors with or without background suppression, retroreflective or thru-beam sensors, they master any task with a range of up to 50 m superbly. Highlights Extremely accurate and fast High performance even across large distances Small, compact housing Reliable measurement even in the smallest spaces with Mini-Sensor (K0/K) Degree of protection up to IP68 Settable sensing ranges Easy start-up (Teach-in) Can be used all over the world: UL/CS approvals Design The devices can be mounted in any position. They should be installed in such a manner as to prevent dirt deposits as far as possible. The available accessories enable the devices to be mounted easily and correctly. lignment Diffuse sensor The sensor must be aligned with the object to be sensed to ensure reliable switching. In devices that have a surplus light function, the relevant must be active. Retroreflective sensors Place the reflector at the required location and secure it firmly. Cover the reflector with adhesive tape so that only the center (approximately 5% of the surface) remains free. Install the retroreflective sensor so that it switches reliably. Finally remove the adhesive tape from the reflector. Thru-beam sensors Place the receiver in the required position and secure it firmly. lign the emitter with the receiver as accurately as possible. Minimum clearance The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. Therefore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sensors. The following distances are recoended values only. The values given are for maximum sensitivity. NSD00795 Diffuse sensor a pplications The various versions of the Opto proximity switches are predominantly used in the following applications: In conveyor systems In packaging machines In mechanical engineering In paper, textile and plastics processing In printing machines For access control These photoelectric sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic. Special versions of the K0 form in miniature enclosure and the C0 are available for detecting transparent objects. Special devices such as the color sensor or color mark reader can be used to detect differences in color or contrast. The analog laser supports extremely precise distance measurements and position monitoring. NSD00796 Retroreflective sensor a NSD00797 a Thru-beam sensor /5 Siemens FS 0 006

53 Opto proximity switches Introduction Opto proximity switches Dimension a D /M5 50 M 50 M8 50 K3 50 K K0 750 K L8 (laser retroreflective sensor) 50 ) L50 (laser diffuse sensor) 30 L50 (laser retroreflective sensor) 80 ) Focusing at 50 m. Setting the operating distance The sensitivity is adjusted via the built-in multi-turn potentiometer. Turning it clockwise increases the sensitivity. The potentiometer cannot be overwound (no stops). Diffuse sensor The sensitivity and the distance should be set such that the object is reliably detected; if required, the surplus light should be activated. The object must then be removed. If the output remains On, the sensitivity must be reduced slightly. Retroreflective sensors and thru-beam sensors The potentiometer is normally set to maximum sensitivity (clockwise rotation). This results in maximum surplus light. It may be necessary to reduce the sensitivity in the case of transparent objects. Cable length Long cables between the devices result in: dditional capacitive loading (short-circuit protection) Increased injection of interference. For this reason the specified maximum cable length must not be exceeded. PXO series The optical proximity switches are organized in different product families in accordance with their technical type and design: Function Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) The light from the emitter falls on an object and is reflected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the output is switched. The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiometer. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors. Diffuse sensor with background suppression Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. ll objects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is suppressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver. SIMTIC Sensors Type Design PXO00 Cylindrical M8 PXO00 Cubic K0, C0, K80 PXO300 D, M5, M Cylindrical, miniature type PXO00 Cubic, miniature type K0, K, KR, K30, K3 PXO500 Laser C0, L8, L0, L50, L80 Retroreflective sensors The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed via a polarization filter to a reflector (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range. n object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch. Siemens FS /53

54 Opto proximity switches Introduction Thru-beam sensors Thru-beam sensors comprise an emitter and a receiver. The emitter is aligned in such a way that the greatest possible amount of pulsed light from the emitter diode reaches the receiver. The receiver evaluates the incoming light to clearly separate it from the ambient light and other light sources. ny interruption of the light beam between emitter and receiver causes the output to switch. Color sensors The color sensor uses three s with the colors red, green and blue. The light is emitted to the object. When the proximity switch is set, the color of the object is measured and assigned to an output state. During the learning phase, the proximity switch saves the detected color in a non-volatile EEPROM. This ensures that the setting procedure will not have to be repeated whenever the supply for the proximity switch is switched on. One color or a color range can be set. Color mark sensor The color mark sensor uses green or red emitted light. The color is selected automatically depending on the contrast. The mark color and the background color can be set separately by means of two keys. Devices for fiber-optic conductors Optical fibers are fitted in front of the emitter and receiver. They represent the "extended eye" of the Opto proximity switch. s optical fibers are very small and flexible, they provide a practical solution to the problem of sensing at points that are not easily accessible. Furthermore no electrical potential is transferred. Laser diffuse sensor with analog output The analog laser proximity switch can measure the exact distance of an object within its sensing range. Due to the use of visible laser light, the measurement is highly accurate and the output is extremely linear. ll laser proximity switches belong to safety class, i.e. they are harmless and can be used without any risk to health (e.g. to the eyes). /5 Siemens FS 0 006

55 Opto proximity switches Introduction T The table lists data which are independent of the design Type Solid-state output Relay output (K80) Devices with laser (L8, L50) Voltage drop at 00 m V maximum.0 maximum. Operating capacity m maximum maximum 00 Reverse current of outputs m maximum 0. maximum 0. Power-up delay ms maximum 0 maximum 300 maximum 300 Differential travel (typical) for diffuse 0% 0% 5% sensors Repeat accuracy for diffuse sensors 5 % of operating distance mbient light limit Sunlight Lux Halogen light Lux Precautions Overload protection Surge protection Short-circuit protection ack-up fuse required Permissible cable length m maximum 50 maximum 50 maximum 00 For further technical specifications, see the respective type Siemens FS /55

56 Opto proximity switches Introduction Circuit diagrams Fig. Fig. N () M8 connector, + U b Typ, C, D K () switching analog Cable NSD00867a NSD00873a N () K () + U b Enable input M8 connector, Typ, C, D Cable 3 U (3) 0 V 3 U (3) 0 V Fig. 3 3 Fig. N () + U b M8 connector, Type WH () Output dark-on 3 K () Output light-on Cable U (3) 0 V NSD00868b NSD0087a N () WH () K () U (3) + U b Output surplus light Output light-on 0 V M8 connector, Type, -pole Cable NSD a Fig. 5 Fig. 6 3 N () WH () K () U (3) + U b Output dark-on Output light-on 0 V M connector, Type F, K, L Cable NSD00875a 3 N () WH () K () U (3) + U b Output surplus light Output light-on/dark-on 0 V M connector, Type F, K, L Cable Fig. 7 Fig. 8 N () + U b M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L K () Enable input Cable NSD a 3 U (3) 0 V Fig. 9 Fig. 0 N () + U M connector, b # Type E, F, H, J, K, L, M $ " Cable % &! NSD0087a 3 U (3) 0 V Fig. Fig. () + U b Screw terminals () 0 V (3) analog () (5) switching NSD0087 NSD00876a 5 " ' NSD N () WH () K () U (3) GR (5) + U b Output surplus light Output light-on/dark-on 0 V Enable input * " & # / 5 " & # # $, & ; - " /! * 7 ` % N () WH () K () U (3) GR (5) + U b Output surplus light Output light-on/dark-on 0 V Enable input M connector, Type G, M M8 socket, Type O, 8-pole Screw terminals Fig. 3 Fig. N () M connector, + U b Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N K () Output light-on/dark-on Cable NSD00879 NSD00886 N () WH () + U b Output light-on/dark-on M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable 3 3 U (3) U (3) 0 V Fig. 5 Fig. 6 NSD N () +U b DC V 3 WH () U (3) K () Output dark-on 0 V Output light-on M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N NSD0 008 N () 3 WH () U (3) K () 0 V +U b DC V Prograing 0 V Switching output light-on/dark-on M8 connector, Type, -pole NSD0 0088a Fig. 7 Fig. 8 N () +U b V DC 3 WH () U (3) K () Changeover light-on/dark-on 0 V Switching output M8 connector, Type, -pole NSD N () WH () U (3) K () +U b V DC Test input + 0 V Test input M8 connector, Type, -pole Fig. 9 Fig. 0 Pin : S-Interface + Pin : M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Pin 3: S-Interface _ 3 Pin : 3 NSD0088 NSD Pin : +U b V DC Pin : Changeover light-on/dark-on Pin 3: 0 V Pin : Switching output pnp M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N K = black U = blue OR = orange WH = white PK = pink N = brown GR = gray RD = red YE = yellow /56 Siemens FS 0 006

57 Opto proximity switches Introduction Fig. Fig. Pin : + U M connector, b V DC N () +U b DC V Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Pin : Test input + WH () Output dark-on Pin 3: 0 V U (3) 0 V 3 3 NSD Pin : Test input _ K () Output light-on Fig. 3 Fig. M8 connector, Pin : + U b V DC Pin : + U Type, -pole b V DC Pin : Prograing Pin : Switching output npn 3 Pin 3: 0 V Pin 3: 0 V Pin : Switching output 3 Pin : Switching output pnp NSD00883 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 M8 connector, Pin : + U b V DC Type, -pole Pin : Time function Pin 3: 0 V 3 3 Pin : Switching output NSD Fig. 7 Fig. 8 N + U b V DC Cable WH Test input + K Test input U 0 V NSD Fig. 9 Fig. 30 N + U b V DC Cable WH Switching output npn K U 0 V RD Changeover light-on : NSD Fig. 3 Fig. 3 N + Ub V DC Cable WH Switching output npn K U 0 V RD Changeover light: U b ; dark: 0 V larm output NSD Fig. 33 Fig. 3 WH Cable N Switching output relay RD K U V C/DC NSD00890 U b NSD NSD0087 NSD0088 NSD NSD NSD NSD Pin : +U b V DC Pin : nalog output Pin 3: 0 V Pin : Switching output npn/pnp N WH K U RD N WH K U RD K U N WH U OR +U b V DC Switching output pnp 0 V Changeover light: U b + U b V DC Switching output pnp 0 V Changeover light: U b ; dark: 0 V larm output V C/DC + U b V DC Switching output 0 V Prograing M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N M8 connector, Type, -pole M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable Cable Cable Cable Fig. 35 Fig. 36 N + U b V DC Cable K Switching output GR Time function U 0 V WH Prograing RD larm output NSD NSD RD OR GR WH N U Control input Control input nalog output Switching output npn/pnp + U b V DC 0 V Cable Fig. 37 Fig. 38 N + U b Cable WH + U a YE _ U a GN 0 V Shielding NSD0089 NSD00895 N WH K U + U b V DC Switching output (npn), Progr. (pnp) Progr. (npn), Switching output (pnp) 0 V M connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable Fig. 39 Fig. 0 NSD PIN : +U b PIN : Prograing PIN 3: 0 V PIN : Switching output light-on/dark-on M connector, Type G, M NSD PIN : PIN : +U b Prograing PIN 3: 0 V PIN : Switching output light-on/dark-on PIN 5: Output surplus light M connector, Type G, M K = black U = blue OR = orange WH = white PK = pink N = brown GR = gray RD = red YE = yellow Siemens FS /57

58 Opto proximity switches Introduction Characteristics D and M5 forms Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor M form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor M8 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor /58 Siemens FS 0 006

59 Opto proximity switches Introduction K 30 and K 3 forms Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor K 0 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor K 80 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Siemens FS /59

60 Opto proximity switches Introduction Further information Opto proximity switch lexicon Terms associated with the technology of photoelectric proximity switches are explained below. Some of the terms are defined in IEC Connection to S-Interface ssignment of data bits Data bits Meaning D0 Switching signal D Surplus light D D3 Test input 0 : emitter on : emitter out ssignment of parameter bits Parameter bits Meaning P0 P Inversion of D0 0 : inverted : not inverted P P3 nti-interference function This function prevents mutual interference between Opto proximity switches. The specified clearances between the devices does not have to be observed for devices with an anti-interference function. It is therefore possible to align, e.g. two retroreflective sensors with a coon reflector. Function of the outputs Dark-ON The "Dark-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when no light reaches the receiver. Light-ON The "Light-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when light reaches the receiver. ntivalent The devices with antivalent output have outputs. One output is Dark-ON, and the other is Light-ON. Surplus light s an alternative, some devices can be supplied with a different configuration of outputs, one output Light-ON and the other for signaling the surplus light. Output current The devices are designed for a maximum output current (rated operating current, see Technical specifications ). If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload and short-circuit protection will be activated. Destruction of the device is effectively prevented. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have a similar effect to an overload. minimum load current (smallest operating current) is not required. built-in pull-up resistor ensures that an output signal is always available. utocollimation With these devices, the optical axes of the emitter and receiver are identical. The device only has one optical axis. This means that there is no close range in front of the proximity switch and the accuracy of the switching point is higher. Spurious signal suppression The devices feature spurious signal suppression. It prevents the occurrence of spurious signals from the moment of application of the operating voltage until the moment when the device is ready for operation (approximately 5 ms). Sensing range The sensing range is the range within which the operating distance can be set. This term replaces any other previously used terms. Correction factors The specified sensing ranges of diffuse sensors are achieved with the specified surfaces by using matte-white standard paper. The following correction factors (approximate values) apply to other surfaces: Test card 00 % White paper 80 % Light-colored wood 73 % White plastic 70 % Cork 65 % Printed newspaper 60 % Gray PVC 57 % lack plastic % lack neoprene 0 % utomobile tires 5 % Sheet aluminum Raw 00 % lack anodized 50 % Matte (brushed) 0 % Stainless steel, polished 30 % Enabling input With Opto proximity switches with a test input, the emitter can be switched on or off. Function monitoring can be implemented with appropriate evaluation of the output signal (light barrier: no obstruction of light beam / diffuse sensors: reflecting object exists). To disable the proximity switch, the enabling input must be connected to 0 V. For operation of the proximity switch, the enabling input does not have to be used. mbient light limit mbient light is the light produced by external light sources. The luminescence level is measured on the light incidence surface. Thanks to the use of modulated light, the devices are insensitive to ambient light. There is, however, an upper limit for the intensity of any external light which is referred to as the ambient light limit. It is specified for sunlight (unmodulated light) and halogen light (light modulated at twice the frequency of the electricity supply). Reliable operation is not possible above the respective ambient light limit. /60 Siemens FS 0 006

61 Opto proximity switches Introduction Integration Sensors and PLCs are growing together Thanks to intelligent linking to the PLC, IQ-Sense can now be used to implement significantly more flexibility and reliability of the sensors. The uniform exchange of data presents a great number of advantages for plant construction as well as for its operation. For example, the new IntelliTeach function permits machine and plant constructors to achieve fast coissioning, since all settings for the IQ-Sense devices can be made using the PLC. Values set once on a sensor can be transmitted to other sensors without problem. Sensors can be exchanged during operation without any extra work since the PLC automatically reestablishes all sensor settings. Furthermore, IQ-Sense permits channel-specific system diagnostics. Wire break, short-circuit, maladjustment or module/sensor failure are automatically signaled, and parameterization errors are avoided. It is therefore possible to reduce downtimes and to increase plant availability. enefits Configuration with STEP 7 Counication between sensor and SIMTIC PLC over a low-cost two-core cable Sensor parameterization through the control (IntelliTeach) System diagnostics down to a single sensor reduces downtimes Replacement of sensors during operation without new parameter-assignment Connectable proximity switches to ET 00S via IQ-Sense module to S7-300/ET 00M via 8 x IQ- Sense module Opto K80 Retroreflective sensor Retroreflective sensor with background suppression Diffuse sensor Opto C0 Retroreflective sensor Diffuse sensor Integration of IQ-Sense into the automation environment Siemens FS /6

62 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 M8S form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 80 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 3 m Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 50 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (white) Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e m 50 Switching frequency Hz 700 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG , 3RG RG , 3RG RG , 3RG Operating mode Straight sensor Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. cm nm 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) (red, polarized) 660 (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3 3 3RG RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 0 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 0 0CD00 light function M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 0 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG76 0 3CD00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 0CD00 light function M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG76 3CD00 /6 Siemens FS 0 006

63 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 M8S form Operating mode Straight sensor Thru-beam sensor ngled sensor Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. cm nm (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3 3 3RG RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 0CD00 light function 0.3 Emitter 9 3RG76 0G00 M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 3CD00 light function Emitter 9 3RG76 3G00 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) (red, polarized) 660 (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3 3 3RG RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG CD00 light function M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG CD00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 5 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 5 0CD00 light function M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 5 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG76 5 3CD (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3 3 3RG RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 5 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 5 0CD00 light function 0.3 Emitter 9 3RG76 5 0G00 M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 5 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 5 3CD00 light function Emitter 9 3RG76 5 3G00 For dimension drawings, see M8. Siemens FS /63

64 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 M8 form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M connector Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range... cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors with background suppression Sensing range cm... (adjustable) Standard target (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 500 Switching time ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG Operating Sensing mode range cm Diffuse sensor with background suppression... (adjustable by potentiometer) Light type nm 660 (red) Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. m cable, PUR, M plug, -pole, type F pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3 3RG7 3 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 3 0G00 pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3 3RG7 3 3G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 3 3G00 M8 form M8S form 3RG RG RG RG M 8x M 8x M 8 M 8 6,6 NSD0_099 6,6 NSD0_ NSD SW 9 Pot. 63,5 NSD0 008 SW 9 Pot. x Pot. GN YE M 6,3 3 SW min. 3 7, Pot. GN YE M 6,3 SW min ,9 65 7, 3 /6 Siemens FS 0 006

65 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K0 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 or M connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 5 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage V DC Solid-state output pnp Solid-state output npn on request Supplied with fixing accessories Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 00 (adjustable) 600 (adjustable) 500 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (white) Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m /5 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0. Type 3RG RG RG Operating mode Diffuse sensors Sensing range Light type cm nm (IR) 3 m cable, (adjustable PUR, by potentiometer) 0. Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. M8 plug, -pole, type M plug, -pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 3 3RG70 0 0CC00 pnp 3RG70 0 0CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 0 7CC00 pnp 3RG70 0 7CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 0 3CC00 pnp 3RG70 0 3CD00 Siemens FS /65

66 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K0 form ccessories Operating mode Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range Light type cm nm (adjustable (red, by potentiometer) polarized) 500 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red) Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. 3 m cable, PUR, 0. M8 plug, -pole, type M plug, -pole, type F 3 m cable, PUR, 0. Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 3 3RG70 0CC00 pnp 3RG70 0CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 7CC00 pnp 3RG70 7CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 3CC00 pnp 3RG70 3CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 0CC00 pnp 3RG70 0CD Emitter 3RG70 0E00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 7CC00 -pole, type (compatible) Light-ON and surplus pnp 3RG70 7CD00 light function Emitter 3RG70 7E00 M plug, -pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Emitter pnp 3 3RG70 3CC00 pnp 3RG70 3CD00 3RG70 3E00 Mounting bracket for K0 3RX7 9 3RG RG , 3RG For M 3,5 For M 3,5 NSD NSD ,5 9 8,5 3RG RG , 3RG For M 3,5 NSD ,5 /66 Siemens FS 0 006

67 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 C0 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 70 cm (adjustable by teach-in) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable by teach-in) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable by teach-in) Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range m (adjustable by teach-in) Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied with mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm 70 (adjustable) (adjustable) Standard target (white) (gray) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 35 5 Rated operating current I e m Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 0.5,5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0. Type 3RG RG Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range cm 600 (adjustable) 00 (adjustable) Reflector Reflector type D 8 Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 35 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0. Type 3RG RG7...5 Siemens FS /67

68 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 C0 form Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range cm 70 (adjustable by "teach-in") (adjustable by "teach-in") 600 (adjustable by "teach-in") 00 (adjustable by "teach-in") Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. nm 660 (red) M plug, -pole, type F 660 (red) M plug, -pole, type F 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red, polarized) M plug, -pole, type F M plug, -pole, type F Counications-capable proximity switches C0 for IQ-Sense Diffuse sensors (red) to IQ-Sense sensor module (red) to IQ-Sense sensor module Retroreflective sensor pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON 39 3RG7 0 3CH RG7 0 3HH00 0 3RG7 3CH00 0 3RG7 3HH RG7 3CH RG7 3HH00 0 3RG7 3CH5 0 3RG7 3HH5 IQ-Sense 9 3SF7 0 3JQ00 IQ-Sense 9 3SF7 3JQ00 Dimension drawing 3RG NSD0_ 08a ,3x7,3 M x 0 /68 Siemens FS 0 006

69 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K80 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M connector or Pg cable gland Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector dvanced version to m Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage V DC or 0 V C/DC Inputs and outputs Electronics output pnp or npn - Prograable as Light-ON or Dark-ON - Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Relay output V C/DC Timing function (delayed pick-up or drop-out, pulse shaping) Enabling input for test purposes Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range m (adjustable) (adjustable) Standard target (white) (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 30 5 Operating voltage range (C/DC) V No-load power, max. V Rated operating current I e m (at C 0 V) 00 Switching frequency, max. Hz Switching time, max. ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG , 3RG RG7 0 6MC00 3RG , 3RG Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range m 6/ (adjustable) 50 (adjustable) Reflector Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m Operating voltage range (C/DC) V No-load power, max. V Rated operating current I e m (at C 0 V) (at C 0 V) Switching frequency, max. Hz Switching time, max. ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG , 3RG , 3RG7...00, 3RG RG7 6MC00, 3RG7 6MC6 3RG , 3RG RG7 6MC00, 3RG7 0 6FG00 Siemens FS /69

70 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K80 form K80 form Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression (adjustable by potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range m (adjustable by potentiometer) 6 (adjustable by potentiometer) (adjustable by potentiometer) Light type nm Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. 880 (IR) M plug, -pole, type F Pg 880 (IR) M plug, -pole, type F 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red, polarized) Pg M plug, -pole, type F Pg Pg, with enabling input Pg M plug, -pole, type F Pg Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) pnp 5 3RG7 00 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 00 3HC00 pnp 3RG7 00 6CC00 npn 3RG7 00 6HC00 3RG7 0 6MC00 pnp 5 3RG7 0 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 0 3HC00 pnp 3RG7 0 6CC00 npn 3RG7 0 6HC00 pnp 5 3RG7 0 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 0 3HC00 pnp 3RG7 0 6CC00 npn 3RG7 0 6HC00 pnp 3RG7 6DK00 npn 3RG7 6EK00 3RG7 6MC00 pnp 5 3RG7 0 3CC6 pnp 3RG7 0 6CC6 3RG7 6MC6 K80 form Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range m (adjustable by potentiometer) (adjustable by potentiometer) Light type nm Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. M plug, 5-pole, type G, with enabling input Pg, with enabling input M plug, 5-pole, type G, with enabling input Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) pnp 8 3RG7 0 3DK00 npn 8 3RG7 0 3EK00 pnp 3RG7 0 6DK00 npn 3RG7 0 6EK00 pnp 8 3RG7 3DK00 npn 8 3RG7 3EK00 Pg, with enabling input Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) pnp 3RG7 6DK00 npn 3RG7 6EK00 Retroreflective sensor 6 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) M plug, 5-pole, type G, with enabling input Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) pnp 8 3RG7 3DK00 npn 8 3RG7 3EK00 /70 Siemens FS 0 006

71 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K80 form K80 form Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensing range m 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) Light type nm Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. 880 (IR) M plug, -pole, type F Pg Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Emitter with enabling input Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark- ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Emitter with enabling input Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) Emitter with enabling input Counications-capable proximity switches K80 for IQ-Sense Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor 880 (IR) to IQ-Sense sensor module (IR) to IQ-Sense sensor module (red) to IQ-Sense sensor module pnp 5 3RG7 0 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 0 3HC00 pnp 6 3RG7 3DK00 7 3RG7 0 3G00 pnp 3RG7 0 6CC00 npn 3RG7 0 6HC00 pnp 3RG7 6DK00 npn 3RG7 6EK00 3RG7 0 6G00 3RG7 6MC00 3RG7 0 6FG00 IQ-Sense 9 3SF7 0 3JQ00 IQ-Sense 9 3SF7 3JQ00 IQ-Sense 9 3SF7 3JQ00 ccessories Mounting bracket for K80 3RX RG RG Pot. + s Pot. + s 3, NSD0 0086b NSD0 0088b ,5 0 0 M x ,5 0 PG Siemens FS /7

72 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO300 D form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 5 (not adjustable) 5 (not adjustable) Standard target (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m 0 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms,5,5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Reliable detection Yellow Surplus light fallen below Yellow flashing Enclosure material D : stainless steel; M5: rass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. nm (IR) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON npn, Light-ON 3RG RG70 0 0G00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type npn, Light-ON 3RG70 0 7G (IR) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON npn, Light-ON 3RG RG70 0G00 Emitter 3RG70 0G00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type npn, Light-ON 3RG70 7G00 Emitter 3RG70 7G00 3RG RG NSD0080 6,5 35 6,5 8 NSD00803 /7 Siemens FS 0 006

73 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO300 M5 form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 5 (not adjustable) 5 (not adjustable) Standard target (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m 0 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms,5,5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Reliable detection Yellow Surplus light fallen below Yellow flashing Enclosure material D : stainless steel; M5: rass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Sensing range cm Light type Connection Switching output nm Diffuse sensors (IR) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light ON npn, Light- ON Thru-beam sensor M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light- ON npn, Light- ON Ckt. diag. 3RG RG G00 3RG RG G (IR) m cable, PUR, 3RG pnp, Light- ON npn, Light- 3RG70 3 0G00 ON Emitter 3RG70 3 0G00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light- 3RG ON npn, Light- 3RG70 3 7G00 ON Emitter 3RG70 3 7G00 3RG RG M 5x0,5 M 5x0,5 SW 7 SW 7 5 NSD0080 6, ,5 30 NSD00805 Siemens FS /73

74 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO300 M form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range.5 m Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range m Enabling input for test purposes Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 30 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (white) Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m / 5 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG RG /7 Siemens FS 0 006

75 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO300 M form Operating mode Diffuse sensor Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. cm nm 30 (adjustable by potentiometer) (red, polarized) 660 (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3 3RG7 0 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0 0G00 M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3 3RG7 0 3G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0 3G00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 000 npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 0G00 M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 300 npn, Light-ON 3RG7 3G00 npn, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 3G (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG RG7 000 npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 0G00 Emitter 7 3RG7 0G00 M plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 300 npn, Light-ON 3RG7 3G00 npn, Dark-ON 3 3RG7 3G00 Emitter 7 3RG7 3G00 3RG RG RG and M x 3RG M x M x 3RG and 3RG M x 50 NSD ,5 SW 7 Pot. 60 NSD SW 7 Pot. 50 NSD00808 SW 7 60 SW 7 NSD00809 Siemens FS /75

76 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K, KR forms Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP68, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 50 cm Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 3 m Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Sensing range cm Standard target/reflector (white 90 %) Reflector type R 60 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m Rated operating current I e m 50 Switching frequency Hz 700 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Operational voltage Red Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP) Degree of protection IP68 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG RG RG K form Operating mode Sensing range cm K thru-beam sensor with 6 m sensing range on request. Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. nm Diffuse sensors (red) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3RG7 00 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 00 0G00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG7 00 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 00 7G00 Retroreflective sensor (red) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0 0G00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0 7G00 /76 Siemens FS 0 006

77 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K, KR forms KR form ccessories Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Sensing range cm KR thru-beam sensor with 6 m sensing range on request. Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. nm (red) m cable, PUR, 3RG pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0 0G00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0 7G (red) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG7 000 npn, Light-ON 3RG7 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 0G00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pole, type pnp, Dark-ON 3RG7 700 npn, Light-ON 3RG7 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG7 7G00 Mounting bracket for K, KR 3RX RG RG NSD0_ Ø 3,3 NSD0_ Ø 3,3 39,6,6 M 8x,6 3RG RG ,9 9,9 0 0 NSD0_ Ø 3,3 M 8x NSD0_009 39,5 3 3 Ø 3,3 M 8x,6 M 8x M 8x,6 Siemens FS /77

78 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K Standard, KR Standard forms Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP68, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 50 cm Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 3 m Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m Sensitivity adjustable using potentiometer Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON selectable Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm Standard target/reflector (white 90 %) Reflector type R 60 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m Rated operating current I e m 50 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Operational voltage Red Enclosure material S Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG7.0.H00 3RG7..H00 3RG7..H00 Operating mode Sensing Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. range cm nm K Standard form Diffuse sensors (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON or 3RG7 00 0H Dark-ON Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Receiver Thru-beam sensor Emitter M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON or 3 0. Dark-ON M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON or 3 0. Dark-ON M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON 5 3RG7 00 3H00 3RG7 00 7H00 3RG7 0 0H00 5 3RG7 0 3H00 3RG7 0 7H00 3RG7 0 0H00 5 3RG7 0 3H00 3RG7 0 7H (red) m cable, PUR, RG7 0 0G00 M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type 9 3RG7 0 3G00 3RG7 0 7G00 /78 Siemens FS 0 006

79 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K Standard, KR Standard forms Operating mode Sensing range cm Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. nm KR Standard form Diffuse sensors (red) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON ccessories Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Receiver Thru-beam sensor Emitter M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON or 3 0. Dark-ON M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON (red) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON or 3 0. Dark-ON M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON 3RG7 0 0H00 5 3RG7 0 3H00 3RG7 0 7H00 3RG7 0H00 5 3RG7 3H00 3RG7 7H00 3RG7 0H00 5 3RG7 3H00 3RG7 7H (red) m cable, PUR, RG7 0G00 Mounting bracket for K Standard, KR Standard M plug, 3-pole, type F M8 plug, 3-pole, type 9 3RG7 3G00 3RG7 7G00 3RX RG RG ,5,5 FS0_ Ø 3,3 FS0_006 3 Ø 3,3 39,6,6 M 8x,6 3RG RG ,,5 3,,5 FS0_ Ø 3,3 M 8x FS0_008 39,5 3 3 Ø 3,3 M 8x,6 M 8x M 8x,6 Siemens FS /79

80 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K0 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range... 0 cm (adjustable through teach-in) Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects (adjustable with teach-in) Sensing range 50 cm Rated operating voltage V DC nti-interference function Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range cm... 0 (adjustable) 50 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (gray 8 %) Reflector type R 60 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 35 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. cm nm Diffuse sensor with background suppression... 0 (adjustable by "teach-in") 660 (red) m cable, PUR, 0. M8 plug, -pole, type Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 6 3RG7 0 0CH00 npn 6 3RG7 0 0HH00 Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 6 3RG7 0 7CH00 npn 6 3RG7 0 7HH00 ccessories Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects 50 (adjustable by "teach-in") 660 (red) m cable, PUR, 0. M8 plug, -pole, type Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 6 3RG7 0 0CH5 npn 6 3RG7 0 0HH5 Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 6 3RG7 0 7CH5 npn 6 3RG7 0 7HH5 Mounting bracket for K0 3RX RG RG NSD0086. NSD M 8x /80 Siemens FS 0 006

81 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K3 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 60 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Sensing range cm 60 (adjustable) (adjustable) 00 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (white) (white) Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP65 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG RG Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range cm 600 (adjustable) Depending on type of optical fiber Standard target (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP65 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Siemens FS /8

82 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K3 form ccessories Operating mode Diffuse sensors 60 (adjustable by potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. cm nm (adjustable by potentiometer) 00 (adjustable by potentiometer) 600 (adjustable by potentiometer) Depends on FO conductor 880 (IR) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 0 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 0 0G00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 0 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 0 7G (red) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 0G (red, polarized) M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 7G00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 0G00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 7G (IR) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 0G00 Emitter 3RG70 0G00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 7G00 Emitter 3RG70 7G (red) m cable, PUR, 3 0. pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 3 0G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 3 0G00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type pnp, Light-ON 3RG pnp, Dark-ON 3RG npn, Light-ON 3RG70 3 7G00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG70 3 7G00 Mounting bracket for K30, K3 3RX7 90 3RG , 3RG , 3RG For M,5 3RG RG For M,5 For M 30,5,5 NSD ,5 NSD ,5 NSD ,5 3RG , 3RG , 3RG For M,5 3RG RG For M,5 For M 30,5,5 NSD ,5 NSD ,5 NSD ,5 /8 Siemens FS 0 006

83 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K30 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range. m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Sensing range cm 0 (adjustable) 00 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (white) Reflector type D 8 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m 5 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range cm 00 (adjustable) Depending on type of optical fiber Standard target (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) m 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (PTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Siemens FS /83

84 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO00 K30 form ccessories Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. cm nm (IR) 3 m cable, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 0 0CC00 (adjustable PUR, (compatible) by potentiometer) Light-ON and sur- pnp 3RG70 0 0CD00 0. npn 3 3RG70 0 0HC00 plus light function npn 3RG70 0 0HD00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 0 7CC00 -pole, type (compatible) npn 3 3RG70 0 7HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 3RG70 0 7CD00 light function npn 3RG70 0 7HD m cable, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 0CC00 (adjustable (red, PUR, (compatible) by potentiometerized) Light-ON and sur- pnp 3RG70 0CD00 polar- 0. npn 3 3RG70 0HC00 plus light function npn 3RG70 0HD00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 7CC00 -pole, type (compatible) npn 3 3RG70 7HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 3RG70 7CD00 light function npn 3RG70 7HD (IR) 3 m cable, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 0CC00 (adjustable PUR, (compatible) by potentiometer) Light-ON and sur- pnp 3RG70 0CD00 0. npn 3 3RG70 0HC00 plus light function npn 3RG70 0HD Emitter 3RG70 0E00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 7CC00 -pole, type (compatible) npn 3 3RG70 7HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 3RG70 7CD00 light function npn 3RG70 7HD00 Emitter 3RG70 7E00 Depends on m cable, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 3 0CC00 FO conductor (red) PUR, (compatible) 0. npn 3 3RG70 3 0HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 3RG70 3 0CD00 light function npn 3RG70 3 0HD00 M8 plug, -pole, type Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 3 3RG70 3 7CC00 npn 3 3RG70 3 7HC00 pnp 3RG70 3 7CD00 npn 3RG70 3 7HD00 Mounting bracket for K30, K3 3RX7 90 3RG , 3RG RG RG For M,5 For M,5 For M 30,5,5 NSD NSD NSD ,5 5,5 5,5 3RG , 3RG RG RG For M,5 For M,5 For M 30,5,5 NSD NSD NSD ,5 5,5 5,5 /8 Siemens FS 0 006

85 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L8 form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M connector Visible laser light (red), Laser protection class according to EN Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp Supplied with focusing and adjustment aid, without fixing materials Operating mode Laser thru-beam sensor Sensing range m 50 (adjustable) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 5 (receiver), 0 (emitter) Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 6000 Switching time ms < Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red laser light, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Red Operational voltage Green Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP65 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0. Type 3RG , 3RG Siemens FS /85

86 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L8 form Operating mode Straight sensor Laser thrubeam sensor Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. m nm 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 0.5 M plug, -pole, type F pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG7 35 0CC00 Dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 9 3RG7 35 0E00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG7 35 3CC00 Dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 9 3RG7 35 3E00 Straight sensor Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 0.5 pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG7 35 0CD00 M plug, -pole, type F pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG7 35 3CD00 ngled sensor Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 0.5 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG7 75 0CC00 Dark-ON (antivalent) Emitter 9 3RG7 75 0E00 M plug, -pole, type F pnp, Light-ON and Dark-ON (antivalent) 5 3RG7 75 3CC00 Emitter 9 3RG7 75 3E00 ngled sensor Laser thrubeam sensor 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 0.5 pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG7 75 0CD00 M plug, -pole, type F pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG7 75 3CD00 Straight sensor 3RG7 35 0C.00 3RG7 35 0E00 3RG7 35 3C.00 3RG7 35 3E00 M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x 75 8 SW SW 75 NSD SW SW Pot. Pot. NSD0085 M x ngled sensor 3RG7 75 0C.00 3RG7 75 0E00 3RG7 75 3C.00 3RG7 75 3E00 NSD NSD00859 M x 7,7 0 8,7 5 7,7 0 8, NSD00855 SW M 8x 75 8 M 8x SW NSD Pot. 75 NSD00857 SW M 8x 75 8 NSD00860 M x SW M 8x 75 8 M x SW M 8x Pot. NSD NSD0086 M x SW M 8x /86 Siemens FS 0 006

87 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L0 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, with M8 connector Visible laser light (red), Laser protection class according to EN Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range 3... cm (adjustable by "teach-in") Retroreflective sensor Sensing range 5 to 00 cm (sensitivity adjustable using teach-in) Electronics output pnp Supplied without mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range cm 3... (adjustable) 50 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector gray 8 % Reflector RL 50 Light spot diameter at 300 distance 0.7 at 00 distance Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 30 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency khz Wavelength (type of light) nm 650 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Type 3RG7 06 7CH6 3RG7 07 7CH00 Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm 3... (adjustable by "teach-in") Light type nm 650 (Laser red) Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. M8 plug, -pole, type Light-ON or Dark- ON pnp 6 3RG7 06 7CH6 Retroreflective sensor (adjustable by "teach-in") 650 (Laser red) M8 plug, -pole, type Light-ON or Dark- ON pnp 6 3RG7 07 7CH00 ccessories Mounting bracket for L0 3RX : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99H 3RG7 0. 7CH NSD0087 M 8x Siemens FS /87

88 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L50 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class according to IEC Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp nalog output Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Laser diffuse sensor Sensing range cm (adjustable) 00 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector (white) Reflector type RL 50 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0, max. m 50 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency Hz 500 Switching time ms < 0. Wavelength (type of light) nm 650 (red laser light) Displays Switching status Yellow Surplus light Red Operational voltage Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature drift %/K 0. Type 3RG RG Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range (adjustable) Resolution µm 80 0 Linearity ms < % of measuring range (0 ) Measuring spot diameter < 0.8 (at distance of 65 ) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0, max. m 35 nalog output V Output current, max. m 3 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 0 Wavelength (type of light) nm 650 Displays Surplus light Red Operational voltage Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature coefficient µm/k 8 Type 3RG70 56.CM00 3RG70 56.CM03 /88 Siemens FS 0 006

89 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L50 form ccessories Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Laser diffuse sensor Laser diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range/ resolution Light type Connection Switching output/ analog output Ckt. diag. nm cm 650 (red m cable, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 5 3RG CC00 (adjustable laser light) PUR, (compatible) by potentiometer) Light-ON and sur- pnp 6 3RG CD npn 5 3RG HC00 plus light function npn 6 3RG HD00 M plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 5 3RG CC00 -pole, type F (compatible) npn 5 3RG HC00 Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 6 3RG CD00 npn 6 3RG HD00 00 cm 650 (red m cable, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 5 3RG CC00 (adjustable laser light) PUR, (compatible) by potentiometer) Light-ON and sur- pnp 6 3RG CD npn 5 3RG HC00 plus light function npn 6 3RG HD00 M plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 5 3RG CC00 -pole, type F (compatible) npn 5 3RG HC00 Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 6 3RG CD00 npn 6 3RG HD00 80 µm 6 m cable,, nalog V, 37 3RG70 56 CM00 0 µm PVC, rising signal RG70 56 CM03, shielded 80 µm M plug, nalog V, 37 3RG CM00 0 µm -pole, type F rising signal 37 3RG CM03 Mounting bracket for L50 3RX7 30 3RG , 3RG RG Pot. + s 7 50 Pot. + s NSD ,3 NSD ,5 0 M x M x 0,3 Characteristics 3RG70 56.CM0. NSD00865 Measuring range 0 V 0 V 5 85 Siemens FS /89

90 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L50HF, L50HF advanced, L80HF forms Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class according to IEC Diffuse sensor with analog output, parameterizable with teach-in buttons Resolution < 0. % of full-scale value Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output Two digital channels, can be set as switching outputs or switching output and one trigger input Rated operating voltage V DC Electronic inputs or outputs, pnp nalog output to 0 m (scaling can be set) Supplied without mounting material Sensing range Resolution %/ME < 0. Linearity %/ME < 0.5 Light spot diameter,5 x 3,5 x,5 (at end of sensing range) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 0 nalog output m... 0 Output current per switching output m 00 Recoended load Ω 500 Switching frequency Hz 000 Switching time ms < Wavelength (type of light) nm 650 Displays Ready for operation Green Status display Red Switching state, input/output Yellow ( x) Status display, trigger input Green Object valid Green Timing function active Green Measured value centering active Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) PT Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Temperature drift %/K 0.0 Connection M plug, 8-pole, type O Type 3RG NQ00 3RG NQ6 3RG7 56 3NQ00 /90 Siemens FS 0 006

91 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 L50HF, L50HF advanced, L80HF forms Operating mode form Laser diffuse sensor with analog output L50 HF Sensing range Light type Connection nalog output Ckt. diag. nm m (red M plug,... 0 pnp 0 3RG NQ00 laser light) 8-pole, type O L50 HF form Laser diffuse sensor with analog output L50 HF advanced Laser diffuse sensor with analog output L80 HF (red laser light) (red laser light) M plug, 8-pole, type O M plug, 8-pole, type O... 0 pnp 0 3RG NQ pnp 0 3RG7 56 3NQ00 L80 HF form ccessories Mounting bracket for L50 HF 3RX7 30 Mounting bracket for L80 HF 3RX7 303 Junction box, shielded RX C8-GF0 : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99H 3RG NQ Pot. + s 3RG7 56 3NQ00 65 Pot. + s NSD , NSD0 0086b 3, M x M x 0,3 5 5,5 0 0 M x Siemens FS /9

92 Opto proximity switches SIMTIC PXO500 C0 form Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M8 connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class according to IEC Contrast sensor for color mark sensing Sensing range... 5 cm (adjustable by "teach-in") Rated operating voltage V DC Electronics output pnp Supplied without mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Contrast sensor Sensing range cm... 5 (adjustable by "teach-in") Light spot diameter 0.7 in focus Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. m 5 Output current m 00 Switching frequency Hz 000 Wavelength (type of light) nm 650 (red) Displays Switching status output Yellow Surplus light Green Enclosure material Molded plastic (S) Degree of protection IP67 mbient temperature C Type 3RG7 08 7CH00 Operating mode Contrast sensor Sensing range cm... 5 (adjustable by "teach-in") Light type Connection Switching output Ckt. diag. nm 650 (rot) M8 plug, pnp 6 3RG7 08 7CH00 -pole, type ccessories Mounting bracket for C0 3RX : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99H 3RG7 08 7CH NSD0087 M 8x /9 Siemens FS 0 006

93 Opto proximity switches ccessories Plastic optical fibers Overview The plastic fiber-optic conductors are used in conjunction with the optical proximity switches of K30, K3 and KL0 forms. The sensing range of the plastic fiber-optic conductors depends on the type of optical proximity switches used. The main advantages are: 7 Extremely small dimensions 7 Small bending radii 7 For cutting to length 7 Visible light 7 Wide range of types 7 ttractively priced TW () NSD0_0093a a TW a () TW = Sensing range Typical beam diagram ttenuation at 660 nm, max. d/m 0. ngle of incidence, max. ± 56 Standard length m ± 0. ending radius, min. 5 Tensile load, max. N 30 Sleeve material Polyethylene Degree of protection Sensor head IP67 Sensor IP65 Temperature range C Solvent resistance Not resistant Version Sensing range for Opto proximity switches Plastic fiber-optic conductors for diffuse sensors individual fibers Ø, can be cut dapter sleeves for Ø. contained in the scope of supply K3 form K30 form KL0 form 3RX7 00 individual fibers Ø., can be cut 3RX K3 form K30 form KL0 form individual fibers Ø, can be cut 3RX7 00 dapter sleeves for Ø. contained in the scope of supply K3 form K30 form KL0 form individual fibers Ø., can be cut 3RX K3 form K30 form KL0 form Siemens FS /93

94 Opto proximity switches ccessories Plastic optical fibers Version Sensing range for Opto proximity switches Plastic fiber-optic conductors for thru-beam sensors individual fibers Ø., can be cut (fine internal fibers) K3 form K30 form KL0 form 3RX7 006 individual fibers Ø., can be cut 3RX K3 form K30 form KL0 form individual fibers Ø., can be cut 3RX7 008 (fine internal fibers) K3 form K30 form KL0 form individual fibers Ø., can be cut 3RX K3 form K30 form KL0 form Front lenses Front lenses ( pair) 3RX7 90 for use with 3RX7 007 fiber type K3 form K30 form KL0 form Cutting tool for fiber-optic conductors Front lenses 90 ( pair) for use with 3RX7 007 fiber type K3 form K30 form KL0 form 3RX7 90 Cutting tool for plastic fiber-optic conductors 3RX7 98 /9 Siemens FS 0 006

95 Opto proximity switches ccessories Mounting brackets Version Mounting bracket for Opto proximity switches with cylindrical M8 enclosure Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 30 Mounting bracket for Opto proximity switches of K0, K forms 3RX Mounting bracket for Opto proximity switches of K30, K3 forms Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 90 Mounting bracket for 35 rail for Opto proximity switches of K30, K3 forms Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 30 Siemens FS /95

96 Opto proximity switches ccessories Mounting brackets Version Mounting bracket for Opto proximity switches of K0, form (included in scope of supply) Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 9 Mounting bracket for Opto proximity switches of K80 form Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 303 Mounting bracket, adjustable, for Opto proximity switches with cylindrical enclosure M8, particularly for Laser proximity switches of L8 form Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 300 Mounting bracket for Laser proximity switches of L50 form Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 30 /96 Siemens FS 0 006

97 Opto proximity switches ccessories Reflectors Version Standard for form D diameter Range typically 0 %, referred to type D 8 D0 0 diameter Range typically 60 %, referred to type D 8 D8 8 diameter M, M8, K30, K3, K0, C0, K80 3RX7 9 3RX7 95 3RX7 96 S8 8 diameter Range typically 50 %, referred to type D 8 M8 P, K50 3RX7 9 R5 Reflector 5 58 Range typically 60 %, referred to type D 8 Light arrays 3RX7 9 R60 Reflector 0 60 Range typically 0 to 50 %, referred to Type D 8 R8 Reflector 8 8 high reflection factor for wide ranges K0, K 3RX RX7 306 RL50 Reflector for laser light, L50 3RX7 307 : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 Reflecting foil 00 00, range %, referred to type D 8 3RX7 97 Siemens FS /97

98 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Inductive proximity switches rugged, precise and reliable Inductive proximity switches are available: With operating distances from 0.6 to 75 In cylindrical and cubic designs In the standard version as 3- and -wire sensors s -wire sensors for solid-state inputs For extra duty (65 V DC or 30 V C/DC) To the IP68 degree of protection for extreme environmental conditions With increased operating distances For welding applications Without a reduction factor s intrinsically safe sensors for potentially explosive environments. pplication examples For contact-free detection of metal objects, proximity switches are quite simply the most cost-effective solution. If an excellent conductor of electricity or magnetism moves towards the sensor or away from it, the signal automatically changes. With their excellent repeat accuracy, they are extremely reliable. nd thanks to their wear-free operation and insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water, they have a long service life. We have covered the complete application spectrum with a wide range of different types and ranges. Highlights Extremely compact and rugged High degree of protection (IP67/IP68/IP69K) Correction factor High sensing ranges Fast switching frequencies Flexible mounting Especially suitable for small spaces Can be used all over the world: UL/CS approvals pplications Inductive proximity switches are the low-cost solution for noncontact detection of metal objects. They are used in sectors in which metal components play an important role, e.g. In the motor industry In mechanical engineering In the robotics industry In conveyor systems and In the paper and printing industry The induction principle and the experience gained by Siemens over many years have made the inductive proximity switches what they are: extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to a lack of wearing parts as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water. Our customers also benefit from the wide range of inductive proximity switches that Siemens offers. Our complete range meets a wide range of different requirements and leaves no wishes unfulfilled. Recognition of broken drills Recognition of positioning screws on the wheel for velocity or direction control Recognition of the valve position (completely open or closed) Recognition of cans and lids /98 Siemens FS 0 006

99 Inductive proximity switches Introduction The inductive proximity switches are classified in accordance with their applications or their technical characteristics: SIMTIC Sensors Field of application and special characteristics Voltage range Output Special advantages PXI00 Sensors for standard applications and for PLCs Operating distance acc. to standard 0 V to 30 V DC or 5 V to 3 V DC PXI300 Sensors for extra duty 3-wire proximity switch: 0 to 65 V DC -wire proximity switch: 0 to 30 V C/DC PXI00 PXI600 Sensors with greater operating distance Sensors for extreme environmental conditions (IP68 / IP69K) Sensors without a reduction factor; for welding applications Sensors for Ex Zone 3-wire proximity switch: DC 0 to 30 V DC or 0 to 65 V DC -wire proximity switch: 0 to 30 V C/DC 3-wire proximity switch: 5 to 3 V DC, 0 to 65 V DC -wire proximity switch: 5 to 3 V DC 3-wire proximity switch: 0 to 30 V DC -wire proximity switch: 0 to 30 V DC -wire proximity switch: NO contact, up to 5 m residual current and voltage drop suitable for PLC inputs, minimal wiring outlay, both current source and current sink, power is supplied from PLC input 3-wire proximity switch: NO or NC, up to 00 m, pnp or npn -wire proximity switch: NO and NC (antivalent), pnp, up to 00 m 3-wire proximity switch: NO or NC, pnp -wire proximity switch: NO or NC 3-wire proximity switch: NO or NC, pnp, up to 300 m 3-wire proximity switch: NO or NC, pnp up to 300 m -wire proximity switch: NO and NC (antivalent), pnp, up to 00 m 3-wire proximity switch: NO, pnp up to 00 m -wire proximity switch: NO + NC, pnp up to 00 m Problem-free adaptation to different rated operating voltages Insensitive to voltage deviations Operating distance far above the standard, up to three times the rated operating distance defined in the standard Wide range of mounting adjustment smaller type can be selected for the required operating distance Reduction of actuation distance is corrected for non-ferrous metals Can be used under extreme environmental conditions according to IP68 by use of a well-sealed enclosure with a special casting compound No reduction factor for non-ferrous metals Welding/magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. = approx. k at 5. pproval for gas : EX II 3G EEx n II T6 X PXI900 pproval for dust : EX II 3D IP65 T 80 C Pressure-resistant sensors up to 500 bar (750 psi) 3-wire proximity switch: 0 to 30 V DC 3-wire proximity switch: NO, pnp up to 00 m Operating distance: 3 Suitable for extreme dynamic mechanical stress Easy to install: The proximity switches can be screw fastened against a stop, no adjustment required Sensing face seal is gas-tight Sensors with analog output 3-wire proximity switch: 0 to 30 V DC Voltage output 0 to 5 V DC Current output to 5 m Non-linearized design pprovals 3RG0, 3RG devices with M or M 8 connectors as well as terminal compartments are UL and CS listed. For a complete overview, see the ppendix. Personal safety Use of the inductive proximity switches is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the proximity switch. NSD0_0080 Siemens FS /99

100 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Design Specifications IEC , EN (VDE 0660, Part 08) Minimum clearance The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. Therefore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sensors. The distance a depends on the sensor size and type (see diagrams in the dimension drawings). NSD0_00796 a Connectors For the cylindrical types, 8 combined plugs or plugs with M threads are offered as standard (3-pole or -pole). cable plug is additionally required for the plug-and-socket connections, see under ccessories. s an option, plugs with an M8 thread (3-pole) are also offered for the M 8 and M 30 types. Cables In general, highly flexible cables with oil-resistant outer sheaths of polyurethane (PUR) are used that are m long as standard. Degree of protection For applications where cables come into contact with acids or alkalis, please order devices with PVC cables. For devices used in applications to UL and CS, PVC cables must be ordered. lternative cable lengths and materials on request. Cable length For the proximity switches, long cables cause: Capacitive loading of the output Increased injection of interference Cables should be shorter than 300 m even under favorable conditions. Cable routing The connecting leads of the proximity switches should not be routed in a cable channel alongside cables that are used to switch inductive loads (e.g. contactor coils, solenoid valves, motors) or that carry the current for solid-state motor drives. The cable lengths should be kept as short as possible; with favorable routing (small coupling capacitance, small interference voltages), the length may be up to 300 m. Interference can be reduced by means of the following measures: Distance from interfering cables > 00 Shielding Connection of coils (of contactors, relays or solenoid valves) with RC elements or varistors. Degree of protection Explanation according to IEC 6059 IP67 6 Protection against the entry of dust. Complete contact protection (electric). 7 Protection against water when the enclosure is iersed in water under given pressure and time conditions. Entry of water in harmful amounts is not allowed. IP68 6 Protection against the entry of dust. Complete contact protection (electric). 8 Protection against water when submersed.. IP69K 6 Protection against the entry of dust. Complete contact protection (electric). 9K Protection against water with high-pressure jet cleaning. (i.e.: water directed at extremely high pressure onto the enclosure from all directions must not result in harmful effects.) Test conditions / notes Test conditions: Iersion depth m Time 30 min If a device is subjected to water or damp over long periods, IP68 degree of protection must be selected. The leak test is based on IEC , test ql. Contrary to the standard, the tested device is stored in steam and not in water since greater stress exists with this type of storage. Parameters: Initial conditions: Operating distance for T amb = 5 C ± 5 C Test liquid: tap water Temperature of test liquid: 05 C 5 C Test pressure: N/cm (. bar) Stress duration: 5 days Subsequent treatment: drying at room temperature and cooling. The final measurement is made as soon as the device under test has reached room temperature. Final measurement: Operating distance at T amb = 5 C ± 5 C. The permissible change is ± 0% of the initial state /00 Siemens FS 0 006

101 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Function high-frequency alternating field is generated in the proximity switch and emerges at the "sensing face". The physical size of this alternating field determines the "range" of the device. When a material that is a good conductor of electricity and/or magnetism comes into close proximity with the sensing surface, the field is damped. oth states (field damped or undamped) are evaluated in the proximity switch and result in a change in the output state of the switch. uilt-in protection The protective circuits built into most proximity switches (see selection data) make them easy to handle and protect the devices from damage. Protection is possible against 7 Spurious signals 7 Short-circuit and overload (DC) 7 Swapped connectors 7 Wire-break (connection L or L+), 7 Overvoltage peaks 7 Radio interference Spurious signal suppression When the operating voltage is applied, the "damped" status is simulated due to the transient condition of the sensor inductor even when an activation element is not present. Spurious signal suppression prevents the output switching during this period. Short-circuit and overload protection ll DC voltage devices with three-wire and four-wire connections are equipped with short-circuit and overload protection. Shortcircuits between the output and the operating voltage connections do not damage the proximity switches, and may be occur permanently; an unlimited overload is also permissible. For the duration of the short circuit, the s are not functional. Polarity reversal protection ll DC voltage devices with three-wire and four-wire connections are protected against reverse polarity at all connections. Wire-break protection The DC version is designed such that when a wire-break occurs in any connection, the proximity switch does not output a faulty signal (not for 3RG6 and all -wire proximity switches). faulty signal is any non-zero signal that is active for more than ms and whose current is larger than the residual current. Inductive interference protection When inductive loads are disconnected, the output voltage rises (without protective elements) to high values whereby the output transistor can be destroyed. The proximity switches are therefore equipped with a Zener diode at the output which limits the disconnection voltage to a safe value (3-wire proximity switch). When inductive loads are connected at currents > 00 m and simultaneously a switching frequency > 0 Hz, it is recoended that a freewheeling diode be directly connected across the load (due to the power losses in the built-in Zener diode). Protection against radio interference The high-frequency susceptibility has been sufficiently reduced to comply with IEC , Level 3 (testing level 0 V/m). Protection against electrostatic charging The devices are constructed such that electrostatic charging to IEC , Level 3 (8 kv) does not damage the devices. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ll inductive proximity switches meet the protection requirements of EMC guideline 89/336/EEC. This is confirmed by application of the EN standard. The following EMC standards are applicable for the individual tests: 7 EN 55 0, IEC-CISPR 7 EN 55 0, IEC-CISPR 7 IEC , Level 3 7 IEC , Level 3 7 IEC , Level 3 7 IEC Displays (s) Most proximity switches are equipped with one or two s. The yellow indicates the operating status: For proximity switches with NO function: Proximity switch damped = lit For proximity switches with NC function: Proximity switch not damped = lit For proximity switches with NO and NC function: Proximity switches damped = lit The green indicates that the operating voltage is applied. This function is only available in certain devices. Siemens FS /0

102 Inductive proximity switches Introduction General technical specifications Differential travel H H max. 0. s r Max. permissible cable length (unshielded) C 00 m DC 300 m Degree of protection With buried cable IP67 With connector and cable plug IP67 With terminal compartment IP65 Proximity switches for extreme environmental conditions IP68 or IP69 K Proximity switch without a reduction factor - With brass enclosure IP67 - With stainless steel enclosure IP68 mbient temperature in operation C ) ) During storage C ) Shock resistance 30 g, 8 ms duration Resistance to vibration 55 Hz, amplitude Reduction factor Proximity switch for flush or non-flush mounting (typical values) - Stainless steel luminum Copper rass Proximity switch without a reduction factor Voltage drop -wire proximity switch 8 V 3-wire proximity switch.5 V -wire proximity switch.5 V ) Up to +70 C with 3RG and 3RG6. ) Maximum switching current for three-wire proximity switches for standard duty at operating temperatures > 50 C is 50 m. Fastening nuts Design Material Tightening torque Nm M8 rass Stainless steel 5 M rass 0 Molded plastic Stainless steel 5 M Molded plastic 0.5 M8 rass 0 Molded plastic 3 Stainless steel 50 M30 rass 0 Molded plastic 5 Stainless steel 00 /0 Siemens FS 0 006

103 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Circuit diagrams Fig. Fig. Fig. I NSD006 3 NO+NC L+ L I NSD0065a NO N K U L+ L I NSD0066 NO / 3 L+ L Fig. Fig. Fig. I NSD0063 NO 3 L+ L I NC NSD00653 N K U L+ L I NSD00663 NO L+ L Fig. 3 Fig. 3 Fig. 3 I L+ I N K L+ I / L+ NC NSD006 3 L NO NSD0065 U L NSD0066 NC NO 3 L Fig. Fig. Fig. I L+ I N K L+ I /3 L/L+ (N/L ) NO NSD L NC NSD00655 U L NC NO NSD00665 / N/L (L/L+) Fig. 5 Fig. 5 Fig. 5 L+ N L+ I I 3 L U L NC NO NSD0066 NSD00656 I NO+NC NSD L L+ Fig. 6 Fig. 6 Fig. 6 L+ K L/L+ I I (N/L ) I /3 X L+ NO NSD0067 L NO NSD00657 K N/L (L/L+) NSD00667 NO / L Fig. 7 Fig. 7 Fig. 7 L+ K L/L+ I I (N/L ) I L /3 X L+ NO NSD NC NSD00658 K N/L (L/L+) NSD00668 NC NO / L Fig. 8 Fig. 8 Fig. 8 3 L/L+ L+ I N/L I I N/L 3 L NO+NC NO L/L+ NSD00659 NO NSD067 Fig. 9 Fig. 9 Fig. 9 I L/L+ N/L I / L+ I 3 L+ L L+ NSD00650 NC N/L L/L+ NSD00660 NO 3 L NSD068 NO 3 L Fig. 0 Fig. 0 Fig. 30 I N WH K U NO+NC NSD0065 L+ L+ I / L 3 L NC NSD0066 NSD00669 N K WH U +U 0 V R L R L bbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60757: K = black N = brown U = blue WH = white Siemens FS /03

104 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Connection examples Parallel connection Series connection ) Parallel connection with contact (NO or NC) DC version -wire proximity switches, for PLCs Not possible since the total of all Not possible since L proximity switch off-state currents U b 5 V must be smaller than the holding n current of the load 8 V I N U b SPS: V U L Series connection with contact (NO or NC) ) I L N U L 3-wire proximity switches, pnp I I NSD0067 K U N K U L L I I NSD00673 L N K U N K U L NSD0067 I NSD00675 L N K U L NSD00670 I NSD0067 L N K U Other connections are not permissible. L 3-wire proximity switches, npn I I NSD00676 U K N U K N L L U b U n min +,5 V U c = U b (n,5 V) L U I K N I NSD00677 U K N L I NSD00679 L U K N L I NSD00678 L U K N L -wire proximity switches, pnp I I NSD087 N K WH U N K WH U L L U b U n min +,5 V U c = U b (n,5 V) I I L N K WH U N K WH U I NSD090 L N K WH U L I NSD089 L N K WH U L NSD088 L C/DC version I K K L(L ) I L(L ) K K I L(L ) K K N(L ) I L(L ) K K N(L ) I NSD00680 K K N(L ) I NSD0068 K K N(L ) NSD00683 With DC voltage operation, a diode must be connected in parallel to the primarily inductive load. NSD0068 The total of all proximity switch residual currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load U b = operating voltage U c = minimum operating voltage of load n = number of proximity switches U min = minimum permissible operating voltage ) The power-up delay of the sensors must be considered when determining the switching times. n U b 0 V U c = U b (n 8 V) bbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60757: K = black N = brown U = blue WH = white /0 Siemens FS 0 006

105 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Characteristics Response curves The response curves are determined using standard targets according to EN Operating distance 0.6 (normal) 3RG6 03, 3RG6 00, 3RG60 y 0,8 0,6 0, 0, NSD0030 Operating distance 0.8 (normal) 3RG 6.0, 3RG 6 36 y 0,8 0,6 0, 0, NSD00303 Operating distance (normal) 3RG0 y,0 0,8 0,6 0, 0, NSD0038 Operating distance,5 (normal) 3RG (Shorty) y,5 0,5 NSD00330,5 -x 0,5 0 0,5 +x,5 -x 0 +x -x 0 +x 3-x 0 +x3 Operating distance,5 (normal) 3RG , 3RG6 0, 3RG6, 3RG6 37 y,5 Operating distance,5 (U ERO) 3RG6 y,5 Operating distance (normal) 3RG0, 3RG0 5, 3RG0 7. y Operating distance (extra duty) 3RG y,6 0,5 NSD x 0 +x 3 0,5 NSD x 0 +x 3 0,5 NSD0036 -x 0 +x, 0,8 0, NSD x 0 +x Operating distance,5 (normal) 3RG0, 3RG0 60 y,5 Operating distance,5 (normal) 3RG0 7 y,5 Operating distance,5 (extra duty) 3RG6 0, 3RG6 y,5,5,5 0,5 NSD ,5 NSD000 0,5 NSD x 0 +x -x 0 +x -x 0 +x Operating distance 3 (extra duty) 3RG6 y 3 NSD0039 Operating distance 3 (extra duty) 3RG6 0, 3RG6 37 y 3-x 0 +x 3 6 -x 0 +x 6 3 NSD00396 Operating distance 3 (U ERO) 3RG6 y 3,5 3,0,5,0,5,0 0,5 -x 0 +x NSD005 Operating distance 3 (pressure-resistant) 3RG6 5 y 3 NSD x 0 +x 3 Operating distance (normal) 3RG0, 3RG0 6 y -x 0 NSD00 +x Operating distance (extra duty) 3RG y -x 0 NSD00 +x Operating distance (U ERO) 3RG6 y -x 3 0 NSD0_006 +x Siemens FS /05

106 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Operating distance 5 (normal) 3RG0 3, 3RG0 53 y 5 Operating distance 5 (normal) 3RG0 8 y 5 Operating distance 5 (U ERO) 3RG6 3 y 5 Operating distance 6 (extra duty) 3RG6, 3RG6 y NSD0050 NSD007 NSD006 NSD008 -x x Operating distance (analog) 3RG6 y 5 3 NSD S I m U V -x x Operating distance 8 (normal) 3RG0 3, 3RG0 63 y NSD0099 -x x -x x Operating distance 8 (extra duty) 3RG 3 y NSD0099 -x x -x x Operating distance 8 (U ERO) 3RG6 y NSD009 -x 0 +x Operating distance 0 (normal) 3RG0, 3RG0 5, 3RG6 5 y 0 8 Operating distance 0 (extra duty) 3RG6 y 0 8 Operating distance 0 (U ERO) 3RG6 y 0 8 Operating distance (extra duty) 3RG6 3 y NSD0056 NSD0056 NSD NSD005 -x x -x x -x x -x x Operating distance (U ERO) 3RG6 3 y NSD0050 -x x Operating distance 5 (normal) 3RG0, 3RG0 3, 3RG 0 6 y NSD057 -x x Operating distance 5 (normal) 3RG0 30, 3RG0 3 y NSD0056 -x x Operating distance 5 (normal) 3RG0 38 y NSD070 -x x Operating distance 5 (extra duty) 3RG6 y 0 6 Operating distance 5 (U ERO) 3RG6 3, 3RG6 38 y NSD NSD x x -x x /06 Siemens FS 0 006

107 5 3 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Operating distance 0 (normal) 3RG0, 3RG6 6 y 0 8 NSD0058 Operating distance 0 (extra duty) 3RG6 3 y NSD00573 Operating distance 0 (extra duty) 3RG 3, 3RG6 38 y 0 8 NSD0058 Operating distance 0 (extra duty) 3RG 38 y NSD07 -x x Operating distance 0 (U ERO) 3RG6 y x x Operating distance (extra duty) 3RG6 y x x Operating distance 5 (normal) 3RG0 3 y x x Operating distance 5 (extra duty) 3RG 3, 3RG y NSD NSD NSD NSD0059 -x x -x x -x x -x x Operating distance 5 (U ERO) 3RG6, 3RG6 8 y NSD00598 Operating distance 30 (normal) 3RG 0 33, 3RG0 y NSD0060 Operating distance 30 (extra duty) 3RG y NSD0060 Operating distance 35 (extra duty) 3RG 8 y NSD07 -x x -x x -x x -x x Operating distance 35 (U ERO) 3RG6 8 y 50 0 Operating distance 0 (normal) 3RG 0 33, 3RG0 3 y 50 0 Operating distance 0 (extra duty) 3RG6 y 50 0 Operating distance 0 (extra duty) 3RG y NSD NSD NSD NSD0060 -x x -x x -x x -x x Operating distance 0 (U ERO) 3RG6 y 50 0 Operating distance 50 (extra duty) 3RG Operating distance 65 (extra duty) 3RG 3 y Operating distance 75 (U ERO) 3RG6 3 y NSD NSD00635a 0 0 NSD NSD0060 -x x -x x -x x -x x Siemens FS /07

108 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Further information ctive surface The active surface of an inductive proximity switch is the surface through which an electromagnetic field is emitted (IEC). The corresponding activation element (target) is moved toward this surface to trigger a switching process. xial approach xial approaching of the target is where its center point is located in the reference axis (IEC). xial distance to target x Distance between the actuating element and the proximity switch axis z at the response point. Current input The current input is understood to be the current consumption of the proximity switch required to operate the oscillator, amplifier, etc. It does not include the current flowing through the load. The no-load current I 0 is the current drawn from the power supply without a load being connected. Differential travel H Distance between the switching points when the target approaches or is removed from the proximity switch (IEC). The differential travel causes a defined switching response for the devices. The switching distance always refers to the switchon point. Switch-off point Switch-on point Operating distance s Free zone Range around the proximity switch which must be kept free of materials which interfere with the characteristic features of the switch (IEC). The volume of the free zone is defined by the dimensions r, c and w, g (see graphic). Z J Z F Z Direction of movement w Q d z k r Differential travel Response curves NSD006 NSD0053 c g k Response characteristic Response point c, g Height points of the transition zone d Diameter of the proximity switch Q ctive area r Radius of the free zone w Installed state z Reference axis Z ttenuation zone Z F Free zone Z J Inactive zone Installation Shielded proximity switches proximity switch can be shielded if any attenuating material (metal) can be attached around the active surface without influencing the characteristic features (IEC). To ensure perfect functioning, a gap should be left in front of the active surface. Sensing face Metal Unshielded proximity switches proximity switch cannot be shielded if a certain free zone is required around its active surface in order to retain the characteristic features (IEC). Sensing face Metal ERO ERO NSD0060 NSD006 Semi-shielded proximity switches proximity switch that is semi-shielded also requires a certain free zone. However, flush mounting is permissible in non-attenuating materials. Magnetic fields Permanent magnetic fields and low-frequency alternating fields do not generally influence the function of the proximity switches. Strong fields may saturate the ferrite core of the switch and thus increase the operating distance or switch the device. On the other hand, damage is not probable. High-frequency fields with frequencies of several hundred khz can considerably interfere with the function (operating frequency of the sensors). Shielding is recoended in the event of difficulties with interference fields. Non-equivalence The -wire proximity switches have two outputs: with NO function and with NC function. npn connection The output stage contains an npn transistor which connects the load to the negative operating voltage (0 V). The load is connected between the output and the positive operating voltage (+U ). +U 0 V Load R L NSD009 /08 Siemens FS 0 006

109 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Operating temperature The specified operating temperature range must not be exceeded. The proximity switch could then be damaged, and the operating response is undefined. Operating distance The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis (IEC). Measurement of the operating distance is carried out according to IEC using a standard target and axial approach. Rated operating distance s n The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defining the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC). This operating distance applies when using the standard target according to IEC Reduction factors must be considered if the material and/or size of the target differ from those of the standard target. Real operating distance s r Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC). This is the operating distance for a particular switch measured according to IEC The manufacturing tolerance is 0 %: 0.9 s n < s r <. s n Usable operating distance s u Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured under defined conditions (IEC). This includes the additionally expected deviations caused by the variations in temperature and operating voltage within the specified ranges. The usable operating distance is between 90 % and 0 % of the real operating distance. This results in the following for a reliable design: 0.8 s n < s u <. s n Ensured operating distance (actuation distance) s a Distance from the active surface at which actuation of the proximity switch is ensured under defined conditions (IEC). The ensured operating distance is between zero and the bottom value of the useful operating distance: 0 < s a < 0.8 s n 0% 00% -0% +0% +0% s Ns n + 0% s n -0% 80% Sensing sr s min s face mins rmax s a max 0% ERO NSD0063 s a Working distance s n Rated operating distance s r Real operating distance s min min. useful operating distance s u (= working distance s a ) s max max. useful operating distance s u Operational voltage The operating voltage is specified including 0 % residual ripple. Output The proximity switches are available with different output connections. L+ L- -wire, DC or C/DC, load connected in series with the proximity switch L+ L- 3-wire, DC, pnp, load connected between and L L+ L- I NSD0055 NSD wire, DC, npn, load connected between and L+ L+ L- I I I NSD0056 NSD0058 -wire, antivalent, DC, load connected between, and L Output resistance The proximity switches have a built-in output resistance so that the output voltage can follow the switching status even without an external load. load resistance must be connected when operating with high switching frequencies (to reduce the electric time constant). Parallel connection Parallel connection of proximity switches to implement logical functions is possible with 3-wire and -wire proximity switches without problem, but not with -wire proximity switches. Please note: The power consumption increases. Leakage currents add up so that an impermissible voltage drop may occur at the load even in the off state. See graphics, Seite 0. pnp connection The output stage contains a pnp transistor which connects the load to the positive operating voltage (+U ). The load is connected between the output and the negative operating voltage (0 V). Siemens FS /09

110 Inductive proximity switches Introduction +U 0 V Load R L NSD0050 Power-up delay t v Duration between switching on the power supply and the beginning of the proximity switch's operational readiness (IEC). Power supply units Single-phase power supply units must be smoothed with at least 000 µf/. For noise suppression reasons, this measure is also necessary with three-phase power supply units. Prograing Selection of NO or NC function using slide switch in bottom part of enclosure or plug-in jumper in the electronics base. Only with certain cubic proximity switches. Proximity switch lexicon Some of the terms are defined in IEC Rated operational current I e (output current) The sensors are designed for a specific maximum output current. If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload protection will be activated. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have effects similar to an overload. Reduction factors The specified operating distance s refers to exactly defined measuring conditions (see operating distance). Reduced operating distances usually result with other arrangements. The reduction factors (see Technical specifications) are only approximate values. Deviations may result depending on different alloys and the type. Influence of geometry If a smaller target is used than the standard target defined in IEC , the operating distance must be corrected by a reduction factor. Reduction factor,0 0,8 0,6 0, 0, 0 0 0, 0, 0,6 0,8,0, Relative side length of target NSD005 Reference axis z xis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC). Residual voltage The residual voltage is the voltage measured across the load with the output disabled. Residual current i r The residual current is the current which flows in the load circuit of the proximity switch in the disabled condition (IEC). It is used to retain the function, and must primarily be observed with parallel connections. Residual ripple σ The maximum value of the residual ripple from peak to peak must not exceed 0 % of the rated voltage U n. The switching response may be undefined if the residual ripple is large. Correction is possible using a larger smoothing capacitor or a regulated power supply. Release point The position, e.g. in the attenuation zone, at which the bottom rear edge of the actuating element is located at the moment the signal changes when removing. Resistance to oil The proximity switches with degree of protection IP67 are not suitable for permanent operation in an environment containing oil. The following must therefore be observed: Lubricating oils Usually present no problem. Hydraulic oils, cutting oils These attack most plastics. In particular, the PVC lines become discolored and brittle. Measures: avoid contact with these liquids if possible, especially on the active surface. Response curve The line on which all response points for a proximity switch can be found. The curve has been determined using the standard target. The sensor-related characteristics can be obtained from it. The proximity switch axis z coincides with the y axis. x k H s x x y z x y z x Sensing face x k x x s NSD0 00 Response characteristic Response point Release point Differential travel Operating distance Direction of motion Triggering distance Distance to proximity switch Reference axis H Repeat accuracy R The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance s r at defined conditions (IEC). The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 3 C (± 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The difference between any two measurements must not exceed 0 % of the real operating distance s r. The repeat accuracy is usually far better in the case of measurements iediately following one another. Response delay t The response delay is the duration which the switching element requires for response when the target enters or leaves the sensing range (IEC). The value is measured at s = 0.5 s n. /0 Siemens FS 0 006

111 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Response point The position of the actuating element when the signal is output. The reference point is the bottom front edge of the actuating element. Series connection See graphics, Seite 0. Smallest operating current I m (minimum load current) The current required to retain the conductivity of the switching elements in the ON state (IEC). This applies to -wire proximity switches. Standard target The standard target is a defined part used for comparison measurements of the operating distances and sensing ranges (IEC). Material of standard target: St 37, thick Dimensions of square standard target: the side length is equal to the diameter of the inscribed circle on the active surface of the proximity switch or three times the rated operating distance s n if 3 s n is greater than the diameter of the inscribed circle. Switching element function NO function n NO function results in a flow of load current when the target is sensed, and no flow of the load current when the target is not sensed (IEC). NC function n NC function results in no flow of load current when the target is sensed, and a flow of load current when the target is not sensed (IEC). Switching frequency f Number of switching operations of a proximity switch within a defined time interval (IEC). The switching frequency is the maximum possible switching rate between the damped and non-damped statuses at which the output circuit still delivers a defined signal sequence corresponding to the activation. Switching frequency s a See under operating distances. Target (actuating element) Parts made of metal with which proximity switches are actuated in service. Form, material and dimensions influence the response characteristic of the proximity switch (see reduction factors). The specified rated operating distances s n were determined using the minimum surface defined in the standard (see characteristic). The usable operating distance s u is reduced if the surface is less than the minimum. Temperature drift The specified operating distances refer to an ambient temperature of 0 C. Within the permissible temperature range of 5 to +70 C, the operating distance varies by max. ±0 % compared to the value at 0 C. The temperature of the target alone has practically no influence on the operating distance. Tightening torque Excessive tightening of the nuts could mechanically damage the proximity switches. The maximum permissible torques are specified in the Technical specifications. SIt specifies the maximum permissible number of pulses per second at a constant pulse: Pause = : and half the rated operating distance s n. The measurement is carried out according to IEC m m Non-conductive material Proximity switch s n / Target Disc NSD005 Voltage drop voltage drop (dependent on the current) occurs across the output transistor in the conductive state; the output voltage does not quite reach the associated operating voltage (to be particularly observed with a series connection and electronic inputs). Welding-resistant Sensors which can be used in strong magnetic fields, e.g. during arc welding, or in fields of electrolysis plants. The maximum permissible value is specified for specially selected sensors, e.g. U ERO. Siemens FS /

112 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Cylindrical forms Form 3 M5 6.5 M8 8 M M SIMTIC PXI00 See page 0.6 / 0.8 /5 /5 /6, /7.5 /8 /9, /0 /9 /, /.5 /5 /5 /6, /7 /8, /9 5 / SIMTIC PXI300 See page 0.6 /3 /3 /3 /6 /, /5 /5.5 /8 /8 /7 3 /9 /9 /5 - /5 /5 5 /55 6 /58 / / /0 5/0 (switchable) SIMTIC PXI00 See page.5 /86 3 /87 / / SIMTIC PXI600 See page /98 / SIMTIC PXI900 See page 3 /0 0-6 /03 / Siemens FS 0 006

113 Inductive proximity switches Introduction Cubical forms () M8 8 M x 5 8 x 8 x 3 x 0 0 x 0 60 x x x 80 /5 /9 /3 /3, / /30 /3 /33, /3 /9 /35, /36 /37 /38, /39 /0, / / / /50 /56, /57 /57 /59 - /6 /60 /63, /6 /6 /65 /66, /68 /67, /68 /73 /7 - /7 /75 /76 /78 /77 /79 /8 /83 /80 /8 /8 /85 /85 /89 /9 /9 /9 /93 /95 /96 /96 /97 /99 /99 /00 /00 /0 /0 Siemens FS /3

114 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0.6 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Standard 3-wire Ø 3, mini Flush 0.6 Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 00 Switching frequency f Hz 5000 Repeat accuracy R 0.0 Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Yellow IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area,5 6,5 NSD0030 3RG NSD / Siemens FS 0 006

115 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0.8! Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form 5 5, Mini Ø, Mini M5, Mini Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 36 0G00 3RG RG 0 0G00 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 36 0G00 3RG6 0 0G00 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp, C 3RG RG 0 7G00 NO contact, npn, C 3RG6 0 7G00 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area 3,3 5, 6 8, 3,3 5, NSD0_03a NSD0030 NSD0_00306a 3RG RG6 00 3RG 00 5x5, $ 5,5 3RG RG M 5x0,5 M 5x0,5 5 3 NSD0030 M,6 5 NSD ! & & N 5 9 % $ 5 NSD SW ,5 8 Sg NSD00309 SW 7 Siemens FS /5

116 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M8 M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 50 No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 0G00 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 0F00 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 0G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 0CC00 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp, C 3RG0 7G00 NC contact, pnp 3 3RG0 7F00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 3RG0 7CC00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3G00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3F00 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CC00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG M 8x M 8x M 8x NSD SW 3 5 NSD SW 3 Sg NSD003b 55 3 SW 3 M x = active area = metal-free area /6 Siemens FS 0 006

117 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Standard (PLC) -wire M8 Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m.5 Rated operating current I e m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact 5 3RG0 0J00 With 8 combined connector NO contact 7 3RG0 7J00 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3J00 Mounting instructions 3RG0 0J00 3RG0 7J00 3RG0 3J00 M 8x M 8x M 8x NSD SW 3 5 NSD SW 3 Sg NSD003b 55 3 SW 3 M x = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /7

118 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5, Mini Ø 6.5, Shorty Ø 6.5 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG RG0 50 0G33 3RG0 50 0G05 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 50 0F33 3RG0 50 0F05 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 50 0G33 3RG0 50 0G05 NC contact, npn 3RG0 50 0G33 3RG0 50 0G05 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0 7G00 3RG0 50 7G33 3RG0 50 7G05 NC contact, pnp 3 3RG0 50 7F33 3RG0 50 7F05 NO contact, npn 3RG6 0 7G00 3RG0 50 7G33 3RG0 50 7G05 NC contact, npn 5 3RG0 50 7G33 3RG0 50 7G05 Mounting instructions 3RG RG ,5 3RG RG RG RG RG ,5 6,5 6,5 Æ 6,5 6,5 NSD0033,5 NSD NSD0039 (x) Sg 35 NSD NSD0037 (x) Sg NSD NSD M 8x 3RG NSD0039 = active area = metal-free area /8 Siemens FS 0 006

119 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form M8, Mini Ø 8, Shorty 8 8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Stainless steel rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 0 Rated operating current I e m ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0G3 3RG0 5 0G33 3RG NC contact, pnp 3RG0 5 0F33 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 5 0G33 3RG6 37 0GG00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 5 0G33 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 7G3 3RG0 5 7G33 3RG NC contact, pnp 3 3RG6 7F3 3RG0 5 7F33 3RG NO contact, npn 3RG6 7G3 3RG0 5 7G33 3RG6 37 7GG00 NC contact, npn 5 3RG0 5 7G33 Mounting instructions 3RG6, 3RG0 5 NSD RG6 0G3 M 8x 6 NSD00338 SW 3 3RG RG RG RG M 8x 8 8 8x NSD00339b SW 3 Sg 35 NSD (x) NSD0035 Sg NSD00333a 0 0 M 3 3RG x8 3 3RG NSD00337 M 3 NSD0033a Sg = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /9

120 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire -wire Form M8, Shorty M8 M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V).0 Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 50 No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G05 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 0F33 3RG0 0F05 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G05 NC contact, npn 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G05 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 0CC05 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG0 7G33 3RG0 7G05 NC contact, pnp 3 3RG0 7F33 3RG0 7F05 NO contact, npn 3RG0 7G33 NC contact, npn 5 3RG0 7G33 NO and NC contacts, pnp 3RG0 7CC05 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3G05 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3F05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3G05 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3G05 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CC05 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG RG M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x NSD NSD0_0030a SW NSD0_003c SW 3 (x) Sg 50 3 SW 3 5 NSD SW 3 Sg NSD003b 55 3 SW 3 M x = active area = metal-free area /0 Siemens FS 0 006

121 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class Standard Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire 3-wire -wire Form M, Shorty M, Shorty M M Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V).0 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG RG0 0CD0 3RG0..0 3RG0 0CD00 3RG0.G.33 3RG0 3CD 3RG0.G.00 3RG0 3CD00 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp Type 3RG0 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 0F33 3RG0 0F0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 0CD0 3RG0 0CD00 With M connector 3-wire 3-wire NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3F33 3RG0 3F0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3G33 -wire -wire NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CD 3RG0 3CD00 Mounting instructions 6 NSD00363 = active area = metal-free area 5 3RG RG0 0CD0 3RG M x M x 3RG M x 35 NSD RG M x SW 7 0 NSD00373 SW RG0 3CD M x ,5 NSD00360a SW 7 3RG RG M x 59 NSD0036b SW 7 8 (x) Sg NSD00367b SW 7 (x) Sg NSD0037 SW 7 Sg Siemens FS /

122 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Standard (PLC) -wire M Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m 5 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 700 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact 5 3RG0 0J00 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3J00 Mounting instructions 6 3RG0 0J00 M x 3RG0 3J00 M x NSD = active area = metal-free area The mounting diagram on the previous page applies to 3RG0.J NSD00360a SW 7 59 NSD0036b SW 7 8 (x) Sg / Siemens FS 0 006

123 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 Cubic 3 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V).0 Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 70 0G5 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 7 0CD00 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG0 70 7G5 Mounting instructions 6 NSD RG0 70 0G ,x5 6 Ø 3, NSD00376b 3 0 Sensor center M RG0 7 0CD00 7,6 8 3 Æ,6 NSD0038 3, = active area = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another. 3RG0 70 7G5 3,x Ø 3, Sensor center 3 0 M3 6 0 M 8x NSD b Siemens FS /3

124 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 Cubic 0 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 0 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 70 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 70 0F0 NO and NC contacts, 0 3RG0 70 0CD00 pnp With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG0 70 7G0 NO and NC contacts, 3RG0 70 7CD0 pnp; q NO NO and NC contacts, 3RG0 70 7CD0 pnp; q NC With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 70 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 70 3F0 NO and NC contacts, F 3RG0 70 3CD00 pnp Mounting instructions 6 NSD = active area = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another. 3RG RG RG , 3RG Ø 3, 6,5 Ø 3, 6,5 Sg 6 6 Sensor center 7 Sensor center NSD00380 NSD00379b 0 3RG RG Sensor center 0 3 Ø 3, 6,5 Sg NSD0038 / Siemens FS 0 006

125 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 M8 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n.5.5 Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type : Subject to export regulation L = N and ECCN = ER99 With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 60 0G33 3RG0 0G33 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 60 0F33 3RG0 0F33 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 60 0G33 3RG0 0G33 NC contact, npn 3RG0 60 0G33 3RG0 0G33 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG0 60 7G33 3RG0 7G33 NC contact, pnp 3 3RG0 60 7F33 3RG0 7F33 NO contact, npn 3RG0 60 7G33 3RG0 7G33 NC contact, npn 5 3RG0 60 7G33 3RG0 7G33 Mounting instructions 0 0 3RG RG RG RG ,5 6,5 M 8x M 8x 6 NSD NSD NSD (x) Sg 35 NSD00388 SW NSD00389a SW 3 (x) Sg = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /5

126 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M M Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n.5.5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 7 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 7 0G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 7 0CD00 With M connector NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 7 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 7 3G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 7 3CD00 Mounting instructions 7 3RG RG Plan view M x M x NSD000a 6 = active area = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another. 3 6x3,5 3,5 NSD00398a 0 5, x3,5 3,5 Sg NSD00399a 0 5, NSD /6 Siemens FS 0 006

127 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Standard (PLC) -wire M Flush Rated operating distance s n.5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m 5 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 800 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact 5 3RG0 7 0J00 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 7 3J00 Mounting instructions 7 3RG M x NSD000a 6x3,5 3,5 0 5,5 56 = active area = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another.. NSD00398a Siemens FS /7

128 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class Standard Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire 3-wire -wire Form M, Shorty M, Shorty M M Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V).0 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG RG0 0CD0 3RG0..0 3RG0 0CD00 3RG0.G.33 3RG0 3CD 3RG0.G.00 3RG0 3CD00 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 0F33 3RG0 0F0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 0CD0 3RG0 0CD00 With M connector 3-wire 3-wire NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3F33 3RG0 3F0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G00 -wire -wire NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CD 3RG0 3CD00 Mounting instructions 5 7 3RG RG0 0CD0 3RG M x M x 3RG M x 3RG RG M x 9 NSD ,5 NSD0_007a SW 7 3RG M x 0 6,5 NSD0_00a SW 7 3RG0 3CD M x 56 6,5 NSD0_000a SW ,5 NSD0_00a SW 7 (x) Sg 5 = active area = metal-free area 5 6,5 NSD008 SW 7 3 (x) Sg 6,5 50 NSD0_008c SW 7 39 (x) Sg /8 Siemens FS 0 006

129 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class Standard Standard (PLC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 M Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V).5 ( V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 5 Minimum load current No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 80 0G5 NO contact 5 3RG0 0J00 With 8 combined connec. NO contact, pnp 3RG0 80 7G5 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3J00 Mounting instructions 3RG0 80-.G NSD0073 3RG0 -.J RG0 80 0G5 3,x5 3RG0 80 7G5 3,x Ø 3, NSD00376b Ø 3, 3 0 Sensormitte M3 Sensormitte 3 0 M RG0 0J00 M x 56 6,5 NSD0_000a SW 7 3RG0 3J00 M x 5 6, M 8x NSD b 65 SW 7 NSD003 These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another. NSD0_00a (x) Sg = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /9

130 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire -wire Form M8, Shorty M8 M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 3 0G33 3RG0 3 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 3 0F33 3RG0 3 0F0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 3 0G33 3RG0 3 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 3 0G33 3RG0 3 0G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 3 0CD00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3 3G33 3RG0 3 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3 3F33 3RG0 3 3F0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3 3G33 3RG0 3 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3 3G33 3RG0 3 3G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3 3CD00 Mounting instructions 30 NSD RG RG RG M 8x M 8x 3RG M 8x 35 NSD007 SW 5 3 NSD0_0056b M x SW 3 (x) 5 SW 3RG RG = active area = metal-free area NSD005 /30 Siemens FS 0 006

131 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Ø 8 (button) M Installation im metal Flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 (3. ) 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m.5 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms.0 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0. NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 8 0CD00 With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 8 3CD00 With single conductors, 0.5 m, PVC NO contact, pnp 3RG0 75 0J00 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 75 0H00 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 75 0GJ00 Mounting instructions 3RG NSD0075a = active area = metal-free area 5 3RG0 75 3RG RG Plan view 8 9,9 M x M x 5,95 3,85 Mounting instructions 5 30 NSD NSD x3,5 3,5 NSD00398a 0 5, x3,5 3,5 Sg NSD00399a 0 5, NSD RG0 75 0GJ00 also possible with non-embedded mounting: Rated operating distance s n = 3. Siemens FS /3

132 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Standard (PLC) -wire M8 Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m 5 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 00 Repeat accuracy R 0.5 Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact 5 3RG0 3 0J00 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3 3J00 Mounting instructions 30 NSD005 = active area = metal-free area 0 3RG RG M 8x 5 SW NSD005 3RG RG NSD006b M 8x M x SW 58,5 (x) /3 Siemens FS 0 006

133 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 8 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire -wire Form M8, Shorty M8 M8 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 3 0G33 3RG0 3 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 3 0F33 3RG0 3 0F0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 3 0G33 3RG0 3 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 3 0G33 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 3 0CD00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3 3G33 3RG0 3 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3 3F33 3RG0 3 3F0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3 3G33 3RG0 3 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3 3G33 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3 3CD00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG M 8x M 8x 3RG M 8x 3RG RG M 8x = active area = metal-free area NSD ,5 NSD0_0050a SW 5 3 0,5 NSD0_00503b M x SW 3 (x) 5 0,5 NSD0093 SW ,5 NSD009b M x SW 58,5 (x) Siemens FS /33

134 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 8 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Standard (PLC) -wire M8 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 8 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m 5 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 00 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type IP67 3RG0 3.J00 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact, pnp NC contact, pnp NO contact 5 3RG0 3 0J00 NO contact 6 NC contact 7 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F NC contact, pnp 3 F NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3 3J00 NO contact 8 E, F NC contact 9 F Mounting instructions 0 8 3RG RG M 8x M 8x NSD ,5 SW ,5 SW 58,5 = active area = metal-free area NSD0093 NSD009b M x (x) /3 Siemens FS 0 006

135 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire -wire Form M30. Shorty M30 M30 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 0F33 3RG0 0F0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 0G33 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 0CD00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3F33 3RG0 3F0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3G33 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CD00 Mounting instructions 3RG NSD005 = active area = metal-free area 6 3RG RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x,5 3RG M 30x,5 35 NSD0_0053b SW NSD0_005b M x 5 3 SW 36 (x) 5 NSD0058a SW RG RG M 30x, NSD0059 SW ,5 (x) Sg Siemens FS /35

136 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0 Class Standard (PLC) Standard of connecting wires -wire -wire Form M30 M30 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact 5 3RG0 0J00 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3J00 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CD0 Mounting instructions 3RG0 0J00 3RG0 3J00 3RG0 3CD M 30x,5 M 30x,5 M 30,5 = active area = metal-free area NSD NSD0058a SW NSD0059 SW ,5 (x) Sg NSD0_0058 M SW /36 Siemens FS 0 006

137 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire -wire Form M30, Shorty M30 M30 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 0F33 3RG0 0F0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G00 NC contact, npn 3RG0 0G33 3RG0 0G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 0 3RG0 0CD00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 3F33 3RG0 3F0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG0 3G33 3RG0 3G00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG0 3G33 NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 3CD00 Mounting instructions = active area = metal-free area 5 5 NSD0058 3RG RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x,5 3RG M 30x, NSD0_0055a SW NSD0_0055b M x 5 35 SW 36 (x) 5 6 NSD0_005b SW RG RG M 30x, NSD0055b M x SW ,5 (x) Siemens FS /37

138 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class Standard Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) 30 ( V); 50 (3 V) 30 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Green Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With M connector, rotatable NO and NC contacts, pnp F 3RG0 38 3CD00 NO and NC contact, F 3RG0 38 3GD00 npn With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 9 3RG0 3 6G0 NC contact, pnp 0 3RG0 3 6F0 NO contact, npn 3RG0 3 6G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 3RG0 3 6CD00 Version for Mercedes-enz NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 3RG0 3 6CD00 Mounting instructions 5 75 = active area = metal-free area 30 NSD 06 3RG " # $ "! " #! -, ; - -, / %! #! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. " 5, # $ " = # 3RG ,3 YE GN 7,3 5,3 30 M 0,5 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor NSD0_00570a 3RG ,3x7,3 0 NSD 063 M x 0 69 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector. /38 Siemens FS 0 006

139 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class Standard (PLC) Standard (PLC) of connecting wires -wire -wire Form M30 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Not flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 5 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5.5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 NO contact 5 3RG0 0J00 With M connector NO contact 6 E, F 3RG0 3J00 With terminal compartment NO contact 3RG0 3 6J00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG = active area = metal-free area 5 5 NSD RG RG M 30x,5 NSD0_005b SW M 30x,5 NSD0055b M x SW ,5 (x) Mounting instructions 3RG0 3 6J = active area = metal-free area 30 NSD 06 3RG0 3 6J ,3 YE 7,3 5,3 30 M 0,5 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD0_00560a Siemens FS /39

140 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0 Class Standard Standard of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) 30 ( V); 50 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 9 3RG0 6G0 NC contact, pnp 0 3RG0 6F0 NO contact, npn 3RG0 6G00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 3RG0 6CD00 Mounting instructions RG " " 50 = active area = metal-free area NSD $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = /0 Siemens FS 0 006

141 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Standard (PLC) -wire Cubic 0 0 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m 5 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 75 Repeat accuracy R 0.75 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO contact 3RG0 6J00 Mounting instructions 3RG0 6J = active area = metal-free area NSD ,3 YE 7,3 5,3 30 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD0_00560a M 0,5 Siemens FS /

142 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 30 Operating distance 0 Class Standard Standard of connecting wires -wire -wire Form Cubic Cubic Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 30 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 30 ( V); 50 (3 V) 30 ( V); 50 (3 V) t 30 V C m Rated operating current I e Continuous m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 50 0 Repeat accuracy R.0.0 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 3RG0 6CD00 3RG0 3 6CD00 Mounting instructions 3RG0 6CD RG0 6CD00 $ " # N # 3RG0 3 6CD00 80,3 65 Pg 3, NSD00608 % % " # " # -, ; - -, / #! 5, $ = ,5 YE GN NSD0065 " 5,3,5 3RG0 3 6CD NSD0063 = active area = metal-free area / Siemens FS 0 006

143 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0.6 Operating distance Class IP68 IP68 Extra duty (DC 65 V) of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø, Mini M5, Mini M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 IP68 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 00 0G0 3RG6 0 0G0 3RG0 000 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 000 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG0 700 NC contact, pnp 3 3RG0 700 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 300 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 300 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area 6 8, 5, 3 NSD0030 NSD0305 NSD0039 3RG6 00 0G0 3RG6 0 0G0 M 5x0,5 3RG M 8x 3RG M 8x 3RG M 8x SW 7 57 SW 3 58 NSD0099 SW NSD00300 SW 3 NSD0_0030a NSD0_003a Sg NSD003 Sg Siemens FS /3

144 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M M Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 00 (NO contact), 000 (NC contact) 5/00 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NO contact 6 3RG0 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 300 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 300 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 3K00 Mounting instructions 6 3RG RG RG0 0K.00 3RG0 3K.00 M x M x M x M x 6 NSD00368 = active area = metal-free area The mounting diagram on the previous page applies to 3RG0.J NSD0036 SW 7 65 NSD00365 SW 7 5 (x) Sg 56 NSD0036 SW 7 65 NSD00365 SW 7 5 (x) Sg / Siemens FS 0 006

145 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø M M Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR PVC, NO contact, pnp 3RG0 5 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 5 0F30 3RG0 0F30 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 5 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, npn 3RG0 5 0G30 3RG0 0G30 Mounting instructions 6 3RG RG RG M x M x NSD00363 NSD0037 NSD00360a SW 7 NSD00360a SW 7 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /5

146 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M8, Shorty M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz (with 3G: 000) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR m, NO contact, pnp 3RG 0G33 3RG 0G00 NC contact, pnp 3RG 0F33 NO contact, npn 3 3RG 0G33 NC contact, npn 3RG 0G33 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG 7G33 NC contact, pnp 3 3RG 7F33 NO contact, npn 3RG 7G33 NC contact, npn 5 3RG 7G33 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 3G00 NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 3G Mounting instructions 5 3RG RG RG RG RG 3.. M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x NSD NSD0_0030a SW NSD0_003c SW 3 (x) Sg 50 3 SW 3 NSD003b 55 3 SW 3 M x 60 NSD0_ SW 3 M x = active area = metal-free area /6 Siemens FS 0 006

147 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance.5 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M M Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n.5.5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 00 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 800 5/000 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG NC contact, pnp 3RG NO contact 6 3RG0 7 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 7 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 7 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 7 3K00 Mounting instructions 7 3RG M x Plan view NSD NSD000a 6x3,5 3,5 NSD00399a 0 5, Sg = active area = metal-free area These proximity switches can be mounted next to one another. Siemens FS /7

148 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance.5 Class Greater rated operating distance (IP68) Greater rated operating distance (IP68) of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n.5.5 Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 0 Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0 0G0 3RG6 0G0 Mounting instructions = active area = metal-free area X.6 when mounted in steel, X 0.8 when mounted in other metals 3RG6 0 3RG X NSD09 NSD RG6 0 0G0 6,5 3RG6 0G0 M 8x NSD00393 NSD SW 3 /8 Siemens FS 0 006

149 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 3 Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 M8 Installation im metal Semi-flush Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n 3 3 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 0 Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG RG6 0G0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0G0 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0 7G0 3RG6 7G0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3G0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3G0 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area X 9 X NSD00397 NSD00395 X.3 when mounted in steel, X 0.65 when mounted in other metals X.6 when mounted in steel, X 0.8 when mounted in other metals 3RG RG6 0 7G0 3RG RG RG ,5 6,5 M 8x M 8x M 8x SW 3 5 NSD0006 SW NSD0007 Sg NSD0003 SW Sg NSD000 NSD Sg M x Siemens FS /9

150 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 3 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Greater rated operating distance 3-wire 8 8 Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n 3 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R 0.5 Power-up delay t v ms 50 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 3 0. NO contact, pnp 3RG6 37 0G0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 37 0G0 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 37 7G0 NO contact, npn 3RG6 37 7G0 Mounting instructions 6 5 8x RG x NSD00 X NSD00333a M NSD0033a Sg 0 M 3 = active area = metal-free area X. when mounted in steel, X. when mounted in other metals /50 Siemens FS 0 006

151 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M M Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 00 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 800 5/900 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NO contact 6 3RG0 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 300 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 300 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 3K00 Mounting instructions 5 7 3RG RG RG0 0K.00 3RG0 3K.00 M x M x M x M x ,5 6,5 60 6,5 6,5 60 NSD003 6 NSD0_00a SW 7 7 NSD005a SW 7 (x) Sg 6 NSD0_00a SW 7 7 NSD005a SW 7 (x) Sg = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /5

152 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø M M Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR PVC, NO contact, pnp 3RG0 6 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 6 0F30 3RG0 0F30 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 6 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, npn 3RG0 6 0G30 3RG0 0G30 Mounting instructions 5 7 3RG RG RG M x M x 9 = active area = metal-free area NSD NSD NSD00360a SW ,5 NSD0_000a SW 7 /5 Siemens FS 0 006

153 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) IP68 / 69 K (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M M Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 00 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 800 5/900 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 030 NO contact 6 3RG0 0K30 Mounting instructions 5 7 3RG0 030 M x 3RG0 0K30 M x SW 7 56 SW 7 NSD003 NSD0036 NSD0036 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /53

154 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M, Shorty M Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG 0G33 3RG 0G0 NC contact, pnp 3RG 0F0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 3G33 3RG 3G0 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG 3F0 Mounting instructions 6 3RG 0G33 3RG 3G33 3RG 0.0 3RG 3.0 M x M x M x M x NSD NSD00366 SW 7 5 NSD00367b 3 SW 7 (x) Sg 50 NSD00360a SW 7 59 NSD0036b SW 7 8 (x) Sg = active area = metal-free area /5 Siemens FS 0 006

155 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) of connecting wires Form Installation im metal 3-wire M Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 300 No-load supply current f Hz 300 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3 3RG With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG Mounting instructions 3RG RG M x 3 0 6x3,5 3, NSD0000 Plan view 7 NSD0075a Sg NSD00399a 5,5 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /55

156 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M8 M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 5 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 800 (NO contact), 000 (NC contact) 5/90 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG NC contact, pnp 3RG NO contact 6 3RG0 3 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 3 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 3 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 3 3K00 Mounting instructions 30 NSD005 = active area = metal-free area 0 3RG RG M 8x 5 SW NSD005 3RG RG NSD006b M 8x M x SW 58,5 (x) /56 Siemens FS 0 006

157 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 8 M8 M8 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR PVC, NO contact, pnp 3RG0 53 0G30 3RG0 3 0G30 3RG0 3 0G3 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 53 0F30 3RG0 3 0F30 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 53 0G30 3RG0 3 0G30 3RG0 3 0G3 NC contact, npn 3RG0 53 0G30 3RG0 3 0G30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG M 8x M 8x 0 NSD SW 5 SW = active area = metal-free area NSD0059 NSD005 NSD005 Siemens FS /57

158 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 6 Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M8 M Installation im metal Not flush Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n 6 6 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 0 Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 5 5 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0G0 3RG6 0G0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0G0 3RG6 0G0 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 7G0 NO contact, npn 3RG6 7G0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3G0 3RG6 30 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3G0 3RG6 3G0 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area X NSD0083 NSD008 X. when mounted in steel, X. when mounted in other metals 3RG RG RG RG RG M 8x M 8x M 8x M x M x NSD SW ,5,5 9 SW 3 Sg NSD0078a NSD0079b 6 SW 3 9 Sg 50 NSD0080a SW NSD008a 37 SW 7 Sg M x /58 Siemens FS 0 006

159 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 8 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M8 M8 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 8 8 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 500 5/30 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG NC contact, pnp 3RG NO contact 6 3RG0 3 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 3 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 3 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 3 3K00 Mounting instructions 0 8 NSD RG RG M 8x 5 0,5 SW 3RG RG ,5 M 8x SW 58,5 = active area = metal-free area NSD0093 NSD009b M x (x) Siemens FS /59

160 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 8 Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 8 M8 M8 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR PVC, NO contact, pnp 3RG0 63 0G30 3RG0 3 0G30 3RG0 3 0G3 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 63 0F30 3RG0 3 0F30 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 63 0G30 3RG0 3 0G30 3RG0 3 0G3 NC contact, npn 3RG0 63 0G30 3RG0 3 0G30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG M 8x M 8x = active area = metal-free area NSD NSD NSD005 SW 5 0,5 NSD0093 SW /60 Siemens FS 0 006

161 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 8 Class IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) IP68 / 69 K (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M8 M8 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 8 8 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 500 5/30 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG NO contact 6 3RG0 3 0K30 Mounting instructions 3RG M 8x 3RG0 3 0K30 M 8x NSD SW 5 SW = active area = metal-free area NSD005 NSD005 Siemens FS /6

162 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 8 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M8 Flush Rated operating distance s n 8 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 3 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG 3 0G33 With 3 m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG 3 0G0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 3 3G33 3RG 3 3G0 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x NSD NSD007 SW 5 3 NSD0_0056b M x SW 3 (x) NSD0067 SW 70 NSD0_0069a 50 SW 5 Sg = active area = metal-free area M x /6 Siemens FS 0 006

163 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M30 M30 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 300 5/00 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NO contact 6 3RG0 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 300 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 300 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 3K00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x,5 = active area = metal-free area NSD NSD0058a SW NSD0059 SW ,5 (x Sg Siemens FS /63

164 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 30 M30 M30 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR PVC, NO contact, pnp 3RG0 5 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 5 0F30 3RG0 0F30 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 5 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, npn 3RG0 5 0G30 3RG0 0G30 Mounting instructions 5 5 3RG RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x,5 NSD005 = active area = metal-free area 6 5 NSD0_0055a 5 NSD0058a SW NSD0058a SW 36 5 /6 Siemens FS 0 006

165 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Operating distance Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M M8 Installation im metal Not flush Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n 0 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 0 Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 5 50 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0G0 3RG6 3 0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 3 0G00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG RG NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3G0 Mounting instructions 3RG RG6 0G0 3RG RG6 3 0 M x M x 3RG6 3 0G00 M 8x 3RG RG6 3 3G0 M 8x NSD ,7 NSD0_0053a SW ,7 NSD0_005a 37 SW 7 Sg 50 NSD00537 SW 3 63,5 0 NSD00538 SW 3 Sg 3RG NSD0053 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /65

166 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M30 M30 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 5 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 300 5/0 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 000 NO contact 6 3RG0 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 0K00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG0 300 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG0 300 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 3K00 NC contact 9 F 3RG0 3K00 Mounting instructions = active area = metal-free area 5 5 NSD0058 3RG RG M 30x,5 5 6 NSD0_005b SW RG RG M 30x,5 NSD0055b M x SW ,5 (x) /66 Siemens FS 0 006

167 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC t 30 V C Rated operating current Continuous 0 ms m m m m Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current Hz 00 5/50 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy Power-up delay ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact 3 3RG0 3 6D00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 3RG0 3 6KD00 Mounting instructions RG0 3 6D00 " " 3RG0 3 6KD " # " 5 0 = active area = metal-free area NSD 06 $ #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = ,3 YE 7,3 5,3 30 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD0_00560a M 0,5 Siemens FS /67

168 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class Extra duty (C/DC) Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires -wire 3-wire Form Cubic 0 0 M30 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m.5 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) t 30 V C m.0 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 0 ms m Minimum load current m No-load supply current f Hz 5/50 (C/DC) 300 Repeat accuracy R Differential travel H Power-up delay t v ms 00 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With 3 m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG 0G0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 3G0 With M connector, rotatable NO contact 8 E, F 3RG0 38 3K00 Mounting instructions RG RG 0G0 M 30x,5 3RG 3G0 M 30x,5 30 NSD NSD SW SW = active area = metal-free area 30 5,3x7,3 0 M x 0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector. NSD0055 NSD00555 Sg /68 Siemens FS 0 006

169 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 30 M30 M30 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) 7 ( V); 30 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR PVC, NO contact, pnp 3RG0 6 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, pnp 3RG0 6 0F30 3RG0 0F30 NO contact, npn 3 3RG0 6 0G30 3RG0 0G30 3RG0 0G3 NC contact, npn 3RG0 6 0G30 3RG0 0G30 Mounting instructions RG RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x,5 5 = active area = metal-free area 5 5 NSD NSD0_0055a 5 NSD0058a SW NSD0_005b SW 36 5 Siemens FS /69

170 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) IP68 / 69 K (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M30 M30 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 300 5/0 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 00 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG0 030 NO contact 6 3RG0 0K30 Mounting instructions RG0 030 M 30x,5 3RG0 0K30 M 30x,5 5 = active area = metal-free area 5 5 NSD NSD0058a SW NSD0058a SW 36 5 /70 Siemens FS 0 006

171 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) IP68 / 69 K (C/DC) of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Flush Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz /50 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR Sensor in longitudinal axis NO contact, pnp 3RG NC contact, pnp 3RG NO and NC contacts, 0 3RG0 30 0CD00 pnp NO contact 6 3RG0 30 0K00 NC contact 7 3RG0 30 0K00 Sensor 90 to longitudinal axis NO contact, pnp 3RG NO and NC contacts, 0 3RG0 30 0CD0 pnp NO contact 6 3RG0 30 0K0 NC contact 7 3RG0 30 0K0 Mounting instructions RG , NSD 06,5 60 5,3 YE 7,3x5,3 8 NSD0056 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /7

172 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 75 5/00 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 00 0 Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact 3 3RG0 6D00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 3RG0 6KD00 Mounting instructions RG0 6D00 " " 3RG0 6KD = active area = metal-free area NSD $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = ,3 YE 7,3 5,3 30 M 0,5 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD0_00560a /7 Siemens FS 0 006

173 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M8 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Not flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 30 ( V); 50 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R.0.5 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 3 0G0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3G0 With terminal compartment NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 3RG 3 6CD0 Mounting instructions 3RG NSD0057a 3RG6 38, 3RG RG RG RG 3 6CD0 M 8x M 8x NSD0057 SW 3 = active area = metal-free area 0 63,5 0 NSD0057 SW 3 Sg ,3 YE GN 7,3 5,3 0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor NSD0_00570a M 0,5 Siemens FS /73

174 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (C/DC) of connecting wires -wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Flush Flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 30 ( V); 0 (3 V).5 at U max m.0 Rated operating current I e Continuous m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 0 ms m Minimum load current m < No-load supply current f Hz 30 5/30 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Differential travel H Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp NO and NC contacts, npn Connector type F 3RG 38 3CD00 F 3RG 38 3GD00 NO contact 8 F 3RG 38 3K00 Mounting instructions RG NSD 063 NSD 065 = active area = metal-free area 30 5,3x7,3 0 M x 0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector /7 Siemens FS 0 006

175 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M30 Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 00 Repeat accuracy R. Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 000 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0G00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 300 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3G00 Mounting instructions RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x, SW SW 36 5 NSD00593a 73,5 = active area = metal-free area NSD00589 NSD00590 Sg Siemens FS /75

176 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 Class Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V) of connecting wires Form Installation im metal 3-wire Cubic 0 0 Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 300 No-load supply current f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R.5 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Green IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact 3 3RG 3 6D00 selectable, pnp NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 Version for Opel (increased EMC) NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG 3 6D0 Mounting instructions 3RG RG 3 6D0. " " NSD00595a = active area = metal-free area 75 5 $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.. 5, # $ " = /76 Siemens FS 0 006

177 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 30 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic Cubic Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 50 5/60 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R.0.0 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact 3 3RG0 6D00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 3RG0 6KD00 Mounting instructions NSD RG0 6D00 $ " # % % " # " # -, ; - -, / #! N # " 5, $ = % % 3RG0 6KD00 " # " # $ " # -, ; - #! N # " 5, $ $ = = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /77

178 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 30 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Greater rated operating distance -wire Cubic 0 0 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 30 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 30 ( V); 50 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz 30 Repeat accuracy R.5 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Green IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO and NC contacts, pnp 8 3RG 6CD0 Mounting instructions RG 6CD = active area = metal-free area 90 0 NSD ,3 YE GN 7,3 5,3 30 M 0,5 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.. With screwed sensor NSD0_00570a /78 Siemens FS 0 006

179 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 35 Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (C/DC) of connecting wires -wire -wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 30 ( V); 0 (3 V).5 t U max m.0 Rated operating current I e Continuous m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) ms m Minimum load current m < No-load supply current f Hz 30 5/30 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Differential travel H Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp NO and NC contacts, npn Connector type F 3RG 8 3CD00 F 3RG 8 3GD00 NO contact 8 F 3RG 8 3K00 Mounting instructions RG NSD NSD 066 = active area = metal-free area 30 5,3x7,3 0 M x 0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector Siemens FS /79

180 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic Cubic Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t 30 V C m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 0 5/60 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R.0.0 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact 3 3RG0 3 6D00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable, 3RG0 3 6KD00 Mounting instructions NSD0063 3RG0 3 6D00 80, ,5 YE GN Pg 3,5 NSD0065 3RG0 3 6KD00 7, ,3 65 YE Pg 3,5 NSD006 = active area = metal-free area 5,3,5 5,3,5 /80 Siemens FS 0 006

181 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 30/0 Class Extra duty (DC 65 V) Extra duty (C/DC) of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic Cubic Installation im metal Not flush / Flush Not flush / Flush Rated operating distance s n 30 / 0 30 / 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V C V No-load supply current I 0 t V DC m 0.0 t U max m.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous m ms m 800 Minimum load current m 5 No-load supply current f Hz 0 5/60 (C/DC) Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact 3 3RG0 33 6D0 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable, 3RG0 33 6KD0 Mounting instructions Operating distance RG0 33 6D0 80,3 65 Pg 3,5 3RG0 33 6KD0 80,3 65 Pg 3, NSD ,5 65 YE GN NSD0065 7, YE NSD006 5,3 5,3,5,5 Operating distance = active area = metal-free area 90 NSD0067 Siemens FS /8

182 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal Greater rated operating distance 3-wire M30 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 00 Repeat accuracy R. Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 (not suitable for use under continuously wet conditions or outdoors) Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 00 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0G0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 30 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3G0 Mounting instructions RG RG M 30x,5 M 30x, SW 36 0 SW 36 NSD0065a 60 73,5 5,5 = active area = metal-free area NSD00607a NSD0_00609b Sg /8 Siemens FS 0 006

183 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 0 Class Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V) of connecting wires Form Installation im metal 3-wire Cubic 0 0 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 300 No-load supply current f Hz 0 Repeat accuracy R.5 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Green IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 9 3RG 603 NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG 6D00 Version for Opel (increased EMC) NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG 6D0 Mounting instructions 80 3RG 6.0. " " 70 = active area = metal-free area 00 0 NSD006 " # " $ #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = Siemens FS /83

184 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 5 or 0 Class Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V) of connecting wires Form Installation im metal 3-wire Cubic 0 0 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 or 0, selectable Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 300 No-load supply current f Hz 0 Repeat accuracy R.5 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Green IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 30 Connector can be offset in steps of 30 NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG 30 Mounting instructions Operating distance NSD0063 Operating distance RG , M x ,3 YE GN 7,3x5,3 Sg 6 0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD RG M x ,3 YE GN 7,3x5,3 Sg 3,3 6 0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD NSD069 = active area = metal-free area /8 Siemens FS 0 006

185 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI300 Operating distance 50 Operating distance 65 Class Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V) Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V) of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Cubic Cubic Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 0 Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz 0 0 Repeat accuracy R.5 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG 6D00 3RG 3 6D00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG 6D00 $ " # N # 3RG 3 6D00 80,3 65 Pg 3, NSD % % " # " # -, ; - -, / #! " 5, $ = ,5 YE GN 5,3,5 NSD0065 3RG NSD00639 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /85

186 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance.5 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M8 Flush Rated operating distance s n.5 Enclosure material Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 3 Rated operating current I e m 50 No-load supply current f Hz < 000 Repeat accuracy R 0.6 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN0 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 7N0 NO contact, npn 3RG6 7GN0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN0 Mounting instructions 3RG6 0.N0 3RG6 7.N0 3RG6 3.N0 M 8x M 8x M 8x 3 NSD00350 NSD0039,6 0 NSD0038 9,6 0 9, NSD , 0 7 6, = active area = metal-free area M x /86 Siemens FS 0 006

187 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 3 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M Flush Rated operating distance s n 3 Enclosure material rass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 3 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 3000 Repeat accuracy R 0.0 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection rass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP67 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 3 0. rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN0 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N6 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN6 With M connector rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN0 rass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N6 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN6 Mounting instructions 3RG6 0.N.. M x 3RG6 3.N.. M x 9 NSD006 50, SW 7 5 SW 7 Sg NSD003 NSD00 = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /87

188 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M8 Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 3 Rated operating current I e m 50 No-load supply current f Hz < 000 Repeat accuracy R 0.6 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN0 With 8 combined connector NO contact, pnp 3RG6 7N0 NO contact, npn 3RG6 7GN0 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN0 Mounting instructions 0 7 3RG6 0.N0 3RG6 7.N0 3RG6 3.N0 M 8x M 8x NSD0_009,6, NSD007 9, 9, 35 5 NSD NSD009 M x 6, = active area = metal-free area /88 Siemens FS 0 006

189 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M8 Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 Enclosure material rass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 3 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection rass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP67 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 3RG6 3 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 3 0GN0 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 3RG6 3 0N6 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 3 0GN6 With M connector rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3GN0 rass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3 3N05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3 3N6 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3GN6 Mounting instructions RG6 3 0.N.. M 8x 3RG6 3 3.N.. M 8x NSD NSD0063 = active area = metal-free area NSD0060 SW SW Sg 53 Siemens FS /89

190 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 8 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M Not flush Rated operating distance s n 8 Enclosure material rass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R 0.6 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection rass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP67 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN0 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N6 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN6 With M connector rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN0 rass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N6 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN6 Mounting instructions RG6 0.N.. M x 3RG6 3.N.. M x = active area = metal-free area NSD NSD0089 SW NSD0090 SW 7 Sg /90 Siemens FS 0 006

191 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0 Class of connecting wires U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire Form M30 Installation im metal Flush Rated operating distance s n 0 Enclosure material rass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 3 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection rass enclosure Protective insulation Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP67 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN0 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N6 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN6 With M connector rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN0 rass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N6 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN6 Mounting instructions RG6 0.N.. M 30x,5 3RG6 3.N.. M 30x,5 NSD00530 NSD0053 SW SW = active area = metal-free area NSD0059 Sg Siemens FS /9

192 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M8 Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection rass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP67 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 3RG6 3 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 3 0GN0 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 3RG6 3 0N6 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 3 0GN6 With M connector rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3GN0 rass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3 3N05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3 3N6 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3 3GN6 Mounting instructions 7 5 3RG6 3 0.N.. M 8x 3RG6 3 3.N.. M 8x = active area = metal-free area NSD005 NSD00535 SW 0 5 SW Sg NSD00536 /9 Siemens FS 0 006

193 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire Cubic 0 0 Flush Rated operating distance s n 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R 0.3 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Green Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 38 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 38 3GN0 With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 8 3RG6 3 6N0 NO contact, npn 9 3RG6 3 6GN0 Mounting instructions 3RG NSD RG N ,3x7,3 0 Sg NSD RG6 3 6.N ,3 7,3 5,3 30 M 0x,5 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. NSD0_00597a 3RG NSD = active area = metal-free area Siemens FS /93

194 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 0 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire M30 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 Enclosure material rass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 3 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection rass enclosure Stainless steel enclosure Magnetic field resistant up to 60 mt r.m.s. IP67 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N0 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN0 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 3RG6 0N6 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 0GN6 With M connector rass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN0 rass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N05 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 3N6 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 3GN6 Mounting instructions RG6 0.N.. M 30x,5 3RG6 3.N.. M 30x, NSD NSD SW NSD SW 36 Sg = active area = metal-free area /9 Siemens FS 0 006

195 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 5 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire Cubic 0 0 Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R 0.5 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Displays Switching status Yellow Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Green Magnetic field resistant up to 0 mt r.m.s. IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 8 3N0 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 8 3GN0 With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 8 3RG6 6N0 NO contact, npn 9 3RG6 6GN0 Mounting instructions NSD RG6 8 3.N ,3x7,3 0 Sg NSD RG6 6.N ,3 7,3 5,3 30 NSD0_00597a M 0x,5 = active area = metal-free area The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. Siemens FS /95

196 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 35 Operating distance 0 Class U ERO (without reduction factor) U ERO (without reduction factor) of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Cubic 0 0 Cubic 0 0 Installation im metal Not flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 35 0 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 5 Rated operating current I e m No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 8 8 Displays Switching status Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Magnetic field resistant up to 0 mt r.m.s. Magnetic field resistant up to 0 mt r.m.s. Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection IP68 IP68 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 8 3N NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 8 3GN With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 8 3RG6 6N0 NO contact, npn 9 3RG6 6GN0 Mounting instructions 3RG6 8 3.N RG6 8 3.N NSD RG6 6.N NSD 0065a ,3x7,3 0 Sg ,3 7,3 5,3 NSD0_00597a M 0x,5 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 3RG6 6.N NSD0063 = active area = metal-free area /96 Siemens FS 0 006

197 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI00 Operating distance 75 Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal U ERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire Cubic Not flush Rated operating distance s n 75 Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R.5 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Magnetic field resistant up to 75 mt r.m.s IP67 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 8 3RG6 3 6N0 NO contact, npn 9 3RG6 3 6GN0 Mounting instructions RG6 3 6.N0 NSD , NSD006 Pg 3,5 = active area = metal-free area ,5 0,5 Siemens FS /97

198 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI600 Operating distance Operating distance Class EX Zone EX Zone of connecting wires -wire -wire Form M M Installation im metal Flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Connector type With m cable, PUR NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 3D IP65 T80 C X With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area 6 5 3,5 NSD00363 NSD0033 3RG0 0CD00 3RG0 3CD00 3RG0 0CD00 3RG0 3CD00 M x M x M x M x 50 NSD00360a SW 7 59 NSD0036b SW 7 8 (x) Sg 56 6,5 NSD0_000a SW ,5 NSD0_00a SW 7 (x) Sg 5 /98 Siemens FS 0 006

199 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI600 Operating distance 5 Operating distance 8 Class EX Zone EX Zone of connecting wires -wire -wire Form M8 M8 Installation im metal Flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 8 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Connector type With m cable, PUR NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G 3RG0 3 0CD00-0X0 3RG0 3 0CD00-0X0 EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3RG0 3 0CD00-0X0 3RG0 3 0CD00-0X0 3D IP65 T80 C X With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G 3RG0 3 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 3 3CD00-0X0 EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X 3RG0 3 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 3 3CD00-0X0 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area NSD005 NSD RG0 3 0CD00 3RG0 3 3CD00 3RG0 3 0CD00 3RG0 3 3CD00 M 8x M 8x M 8x M 8x 5 NSD005 SW NSD006b M x SW 58,5 (x) 5 0,5 NSD0093 SW ,5 NSD009b M x SW 58,5 (x) Siemens FS /99

200 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI600 Operating distance 0 Operating distance 5 Class EX Zone EX Zone of connecting wires -wire -wire Form M30 M30 Installation im metal Flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 0 5 Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) 5 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow Yellow Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output Connector type With m cable, PUR NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 3RG0 0CD00-0X0 3D IP65 T80 C X With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 3CD00-0X0 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area NSD005 NSD0058 3RG0 0CD00 3RG0 3CD00 3RG0 0CD00 3RG0 3CD00 M 30x,5 M 30x,5 M 30x,5 M 30x,5 5 NSD0058a SW NSD0059 SW ,5 (x) Sg 5 6 NSD0_005b SW NSD0055b M x SW ,5 (x) /00 Siemens FS 0 006

201 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI600 Operating distance 5 Operating distance 35 Class EX Zone EX Zone of connecting wires -wire -wire Form Cubic 0 x 0 Cubic 0 x 0 Installation im metal Flush Not flush Rated operating distance s n 5 35 Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 30( V); 0 (3 V) 30 ( V); 0 (3 V) Rated operating current I e m 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 50 ( 85 C) No-load supply current f Hz Repeat accuracy R Differential travel H Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow Yellow Power supply Green Green Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Switching output With M connector NO and NC contacts, pnp Zone, II 3G, (gas); EX II 3G EEx n II T6 X Zone, II 3D, (dust); EX II 3D IP65 T80 C X Connector type 3RG0 38 3CD00-0X0 3RG0 38 3CD00-0X0 3RG 8 3CD00-0X0 3RG 8 3CD00-0X0 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form = active area = metal-free area NSD 06 NSD 066 3RG0 38 3CD00 3RG 8 3CD NSD NSD ,3x7,3 0 M x ,3x7,3 0 M x 0 Siemens FS /0

202 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI900 Operating distance 3, pressure resistant up to 500 bar Class Pressure-resistant up to 500 bar of connecting wires 3-wire Form M Installation im metal Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n 3 Enclosure material Stainless steel, sensor surface aluminium oxide ceramic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 Rated operating current I e m 00 No-load supply current f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R 0. Power-up delay t v ms 0 Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 Type 3RG6 5.P.00 Switching output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR NO contact, pnp 3RG6 5 0PG00 NC contact, pnp 3RG6 5 0PF00 NO contact, npn 3 3RG6 5 0P00 NC contact, npn 3RG6 5 0P00 With M connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG6 5 3PG00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG6 5 3PF00 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG6 5 3P00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG6 5 3P00 Mounting instructions 8 3RG6 5 0P.00,3 3RG6 5 3P.00,3 9 X 8,6 30 M x,5 8,6 30 M x,5 NSD00 56,5 NSD0_0009a 65 NSD0_0008a Sg = active area = metal-free area X. when mounted in steel, X. when mounted in other metals SW 9 SW 9 M x /0 Siemens FS 0 006

203 Inductive Proximity Switches SIMTIC PXI900 Operating distance 0-6, with analog output Class of connecting wires Form Installation im metal nalog output -wire M Semi-flush Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material rass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 m 0 No-load supply current f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R 0.3 Power-up delay t v ms 50 Output voltage () at 5 C With s = 0 V 0 ( V) With s = 3 V +.7 (±0. V) With s = 6 V +5.0 (±0. V) Load current at voltage output max. 0 m Output voltage () at 5 C With s = 0 m.0 (±0. m) With s = 6 m 5.0 (±0. m) Max. resistive load at current output With U = 0 V kω With U = 30 V kω 5 Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type IP67 3RG6.N00 nalog output Ckt. diag. Connector type With m cable, PUR 0.5 Voltage + current 30 3RG6 0N00 With M connector Voltage + current 30 F 3RG6 3N00 Mounting instructions 6 6 3RG6 0N00 M x 3RG6 3N00 M x 9 50 SW SW 7 = active area = metal-free area NSD0088 NSD0085 NSD0086a Sg Siemens FS /03

204 Capacitive Proximity Switches Introduction Capacitive proximity switches Check fluid levels and more Standards The same standards are applicable as for the inductive proximity switches. Types The proximity switches are available in DC or C versions: The DC versions can activate electronic controllers (SIMTIC) or relays directly. With the C version, the load (contactor relay, solenoid valve) is connected directly to the C supply network (preferably 30 V, 50 Hz) in series with the proximity switches. Function The sensing face of a capacitive sensor is formed by two concentrically arranged metal electrodes that are equivalent to the electrodes of an unwound capacitor. The electrode surfaces and are connected into the feedback branch of a high-frequency oscillator that is tuned such that it does not oscillate when the surface is free. Capacitive proximity switches are also non-contact sensors and respond to the same degree almost instinctively when conducting and non-conducting materials in solid, powder or liquid state are to be measured. They impress customers especially in the case of fill level monitoring through non-metallic materials such as plastic or glass and through various materials in the case of counting objects. Highlights Detection of all materials (e.g. plastics, wood, paper) Measurement of liquids through plastic tubes or glass pipes Measurement of aggressive chemicals djustable compensation of operating distance on the object pplication examples + - When an object approaches the active face of the sensor, it enters the electric field in front of the electrode surfaces and causes a change in the coupling capacitance. The oscillator starts to oscillate; the amplitude is recorded by an evaluation circuit and converted into a switching coand. Switching rate The build-up characteristics specific to other pulse/interval conditions may result in higher switching frequencies than those specified. Operating distance The stated values are applicable to a target of metal which is grounded and whose area corresponds to the sensing face of the proximity switch. The real operating distance s r for non-conductive targets is dependent on the relative dielectric constant ε r and the characteristic value (see characteristic curve). 80 NSD0_007 e r 60 Recognition of milk in cartons %00 s r NSD0_007 Level control for bulk material in vessel /0 Siemens FS 0 006